1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2067 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2071 Horizontal scrolling test.
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2081 \begin_inset Tabular
2082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_layout Section
2129 Input/Word Completion
2130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2132 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2137 \begin_inset Index idx
2140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 \begin_layout Standard
2183 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2185 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2186 is used to propose completions.
2189 \begin_layout Standard
2190 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2193 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2198 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2209 \begin_inset space ~
2214 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2218 \begin_inset space ~
2223 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2224 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2228 \begin_inset space ~
2234 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2235 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2236 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2237 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2240 \begin_layout Standard
2242 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2243 completions available.
2248 key to accept a proposed completion.
2249 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2250 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2251 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2259 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2260 ing options for text.
2261 The special math option
2265 enables characters to be composed.
2266 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2267 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2270 , you can then input the characters
2271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2282 to a formula to get it.
2283 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2284 of the math toolbar.
2285 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2289 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2290 's installation folder.
2291 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2300 \begin_layout Section
2302 \begin_inset Index idx
2305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2312 \begin_inset Index idx
2315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2344 \begin_inset Index idx
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2378 \begin_layout Standard
2379 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2393 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2396 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2400 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2401 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2407 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2414 \begin_layout Standard
2418 \begin_inset space ~
2426 \begin_inset space ~
2447 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2451 \begin_layout Labeling
2452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2457 LatexCommand nomenclature
2459 description "Tabulator key"
2466 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2468 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2469 \begin_inset space ~
2473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2475 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2482 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2486 , especially section
2487 \begin_inset space ~
2491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2493 reference "subsec:Lists"
2499 If you are still confused, look in the
2504 \begin_inset Newline newline
2512 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2513 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2517 \begin_layout Labeling
2518 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2522 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2523 LatexCommand nomenclature
2525 description "Escape key"
2533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2540 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2541 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2544 \begin_layout Labeling
2545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2551 \begin_inset space ~
2555 \begin_inset space ~
2562 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2563 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2567 \begin_layout Standard
2568 There are three modifier keys:
2571 \begin_layout Labeling
2572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2590 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2591 LatexCommand nomenclature
2593 description "Control key"
2598 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2599 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2615 \begin_layout Itemize
2624 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2627 \begin_layout Itemize
2636 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2640 \begin_layout Labeling
2641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2659 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2660 LatexCommand nomenclature
2662 description "Shift key"
2667 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2668 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2671 \begin_layout Labeling
2672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2690 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2691 LatexCommand nomenclature
2693 description "Alt or Meta key"
2698 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2699 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2700 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2706 \begin_inset Newline newline
2709 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2711 menu accelerator keys
2714 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2715 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2719 \begin_layout Standard
2720 For example, the sequence
2721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset space ~
2731 \begin_inset space ~
2737 \begin_inset space ~
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2764 \begin_inset space ~
2770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2780 \begin_layout Standard
2785 manual lists all other things bound to the
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2794 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2796 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2797 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2798 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2799 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2800 The \SpecialChar LyX
2801 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2802 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2803 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2805 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2821 followed by a capital
2828 \begin_layout Chapter
2831 \begin_inset Index idx
2834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2844 \begin_layout Section
2846 \begin_inset Index idx
2849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2862 \begin_layout Standard
2863 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2864 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2865 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2866 numbering schemes, and so on.
2867 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2868 and format the title of your document differently.
2871 \begin_layout Standard
2876 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2877 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2878 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2879 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2880 picks one for you by default.
2881 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2884 \begin_layout Subsection
2886 \begin_inset Index idx
2889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2898 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 You can select a class using the
2908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2909 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2913 \begin_inset Index idx
2916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2923 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2931 \begin_layout Standard
2932 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2937 \begin_layout Description
2938 Article for basic articles
2941 \begin_layout Description
2942 Report for basic reports
2945 \begin_layout Description
2946 Book for writing a book
2949 \begin_layout Description
2950 Letter for US-style letters
2953 \begin_layout Standard
2954 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2955 only uses if you have installed
2956 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2958 distributions will include
2960 Here are some of the classes.
2961 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2963 Special Document Classes
2972 \begin_layout Description
2973 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2976 \begin_layout Description
2977 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2981 \begin_layout Description
2982 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2988 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2989 There are three article layouts available.
2990 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2991 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2992 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2993 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2998 sequential numbering
2999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3002 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3003 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3004 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3005 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3008 \begin_layout Description
3009 Beamer Layout for presentations
3012 \begin_layout Description
3013 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3014 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3015 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3016 with \SpecialChar LyX
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3024 \begin_layout Description
3026 \begin_inset space ~
3029 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 Foils Used to make transparencies
3040 \begin_layout Description
3041 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3042 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3043 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3044 with \SpecialChar LyX
3048 \begin_layout Description
3049 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3050 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3053 \begin_layout Description
3054 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3057 \begin_layout Description
3058 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3063 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3064 (Is used by this document.)
3067 \begin_layout Description
3068 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3075 \begin_layout Description
3080 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3081 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3083 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3087 \begin_layout Description
3088 Slides Used to make transparencies
3091 \begin_layout Description
3093 \begin_inset space ~
3096 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3097 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3100 \begin_layout Description
3101 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3104 \begin_layout Standard
3105 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3107 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3109 Special Document Classes
3116 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3117 of the document classes.
3120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3124 \begin_layout Standard
3125 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3130 \begin_inset Index idx
3133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3150 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3151 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3153 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3159 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3164 , are highly specialized.
3166 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3167 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3168 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3169 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3170 by some document class.
3171 There are just too many of them.
3172 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3175 \begin_layout Standard
3176 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3184 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3185 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3186 document class for a new file.
3188 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3191 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 manual for information on how to install them.
3199 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3205 \begin_layout Standard
3206 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3207 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3208 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3209 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3210 class files to be used for dissertation
3211 s submitted to those universities.
3212 The \SpecialChar LyX
3213 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3215 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3219 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3225 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3232 name "subsec:Modules"
3237 \begin_inset Index idx
3240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3249 \begin_layout Standard
3250 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3251 chosen document class.
3252 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3253 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3264 \begin_inset Index idx
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3274 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3278 \begin_layout Standard
3279 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3280 packages or file format converters that are not always
3281 installed by default.
3283 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3284 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3285 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3286 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3288 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3289 file without the missing prerequisites.
3290 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3291 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3298 \begin_inset Index idx
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3302 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3308 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3313 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3325 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3327 will advise you about these things.
3335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3339 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3344 \begin_inset Index idx
3347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3348 Document ! Local Layout
3356 \begin_layout Standard
3357 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3358 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3359 : They are intended to be used in
3360 a variety of different documents.
3361 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3362 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3363 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3364 need a specific inset or
3365 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3367 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3370 style only that one time.
3371 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3373 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3391 manual for information on how to use it.
3394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3398 \begin_layout Standard
3399 Each class has a default set of options.
3400 Here's a quick table describing them:
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3410 \begin_layout Standard
3412 \begin_inset Tabular
3413 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3414 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3415 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3416 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3417 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3880 \begin_layout Standard
3881 You're probably also wondering what
3882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3886 \begin_inset space ~
3890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3894 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3895 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3900 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3905 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3915 headings, there are also
3923 headings, and so on.
3924 We will describe these headings fully in section
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3931 reference "subsec:Headings"
3938 \begin_layout Subsection
3940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3942 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3947 \begin_inset Index idx
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3957 \begin_inset Index idx
3960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3969 \begin_layout Standard
3970 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3987 \begin_inset space ~
3992 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3994 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3995 doesn't support special options you want to
3996 use for your document.
3997 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3998 -class and its options, you have to read
4002 \begin_layout Standard
4006 \begin_inset space ~
4013 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4019 \begin_inset space ~
4024 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4025 You can choose between the following five options:
4028 \begin_layout Labeling
4029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4034 Use default page style of current class.
4037 \begin_layout Labeling
4038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4043 No page numbers or headings.
4046 \begin_layout Labeling
4047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4055 \begin_layout Labeling
4056 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4061 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4062 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4063 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4064 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4067 \begin_layout Labeling
4068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4073 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4074 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4080 \begin_inset Index idx
4083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4091 How they are defined is explained in section
4092 \begin_inset space ~
4096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4098 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4105 \begin_layout Standard
4106 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4107 \begin_inset space ~
4111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4113 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4120 \begin_layout Subsection
4121 Paper Size and Orientation
4122 \begin_inset Index idx
4125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4126 Document ! Paper size
4132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4134 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4141 \begin_layout Standard
4142 You can find the following options in the menu
4145 \begin_inset space ~
4152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4156 \begin_inset Index idx
4159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4168 \begin_layout Labeling
4169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4173 \begin_inset space ~
4178 What size paper to print on.
4183 \begin_layout Itemize
4189 \begin_layout Itemize
4195 \begin_layout Itemize
4201 \begin_layout Itemize
4207 \begin_layout Itemize
4210 US letter, US legal, US executive
4213 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Itemize
4226 \begin_layout Labeling
4227 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4232 To choose whether to output as
4243 \begin_layout Labeling
4244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4248 \begin_inset space ~
4253 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4254 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4257 \begin_layout Subsection
4259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4261 name "subsec:Margins"
4266 \begin_inset Index idx
4269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4276 \begin_inset Index idx
4279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4288 \begin_layout Standard
4289 Paper margins are set in the menu
4291 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4295 \begin_inset Index idx
4298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4307 \begin_layout Standard
4308 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4309 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4310 the paper format and the font size into account.
4313 \begin_layout Subsection
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4318 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4324 That includes the paragraph environments.
4325 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4326 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4327 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4329 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4338 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4340 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4341 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4342 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4345 \begin_layout Section
4346 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4347 \begin_inset Index idx
4350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4351 Paragraph ! Indentation
4359 \begin_layout Subsection
4361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4363 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4371 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4372 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4375 \begin_layout Standard
4376 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4377 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4378 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4379 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4383 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4389 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4390 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4391 language than English.
4393 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4396 \begin_layout Standard
4397 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4398 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4399 into \SpecialChar LyX
4401 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4404 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4406 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4407 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4408 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4415 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4416 goes to produce a printable file.
4421 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4423 gives you the ability globally to change
4427 these pre-coded spacings.
4428 We will explain more later.
4431 \begin_layout Subsection
4432 Paragraph Separation
4433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4435 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4440 \begin_inset Index idx
4443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4444 Paragraph ! Separation
4452 \begin_layout Standard
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4468 \begin_inset space ~
4475 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset Index idx
4482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4488 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4491 \begin_layout Subsection
4495 \begin_layout Standard
4496 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4499 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 dialog and toggle the
4509 \begin_inset space ~
4514 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4517 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4521 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4522 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4526 \begin_layout Standard
4527 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4528 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4531 \begin_layout Subsection
4533 \begin_inset Index idx
4536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4537 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4545 \begin_layout Standard
4548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4552 \begin_inset Index idx
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4564 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4568 \begin_inset space ~
4577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4578 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4584 \begin_inset Index idx
4587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4594 installed to use this feature.
4599 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4601 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4603 \begin_inset space ~
4608 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4609 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4612 \begin_layout Section
4613 Paragraph Environments
4614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4616 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4621 \begin_inset Index idx
4624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4625 Paragraph ! Environments
4631 \begin_inset Index idx
4634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4635 Paragraph environments|(
4643 \begin_layout Subsection
4647 \begin_layout Standard
4648 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4651 \begin_layout Standard
4660 } \SpecialChar ldots
4670 \begin_inset Newline newline
4673 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4675 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4676 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4677 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4686 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4689 \begin_layout Standard
4690 A paragraph environment is simply a
4691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4698 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4699 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4700 scheme, labels, and so on.
4701 Additionally, you can
4702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4709 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4710 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4711 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4712 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4714 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4716 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4719 \begin_layout Standard
4720 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4721 \begin_inset Graphics
4722 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4728 at the left end of the toolbar.
4730 will change the environment of the
4734 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4735 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4736 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4740 \begin_layout Standard
4749 create a new paragraph using the
4753 paragraph environment.
4755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4762 because if you are in one of these environments:
4765 \begin_layout Itemize
4771 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 \begin_layout Itemize
4783 \begin_layout Itemize
4789 \begin_layout Itemize
4795 \begin_layout Itemize
4801 \begin_layout Itemize
4807 \begin_layout Standard
4809 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4813 , rather than resetting it to
4818 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4819 \begin_inset space ~
4823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4825 reference "sec:Nesting"
4832 \begin_layout Subsection
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 The default paragraph environment is
4842 It creates a plain paragraph.
4844 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4845 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4846 this manual) are in the
4853 \begin_layout Standard
4854 You can nest a paragraph using the
4858 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4866 \begin_layout Subsection
4868 \begin_inset Index idx
4871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4880 \begin_layout Standard
4881 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4882 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4891 for thanks or contact information.
4892 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4893 places all of this on a separate page
4894 along with today's date.
4895 For other types of documents, the title
4896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4903 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4907 \begin_layout Standard
4909 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4923 Here's how you use them:
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the title of your document in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 Put the author name in the
4942 \begin_layout Itemize
4943 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4944 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4950 Note that using this environment is optional.
4951 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4952 will automatically insert today's date.
4953 If you don't want a date, use the option
4955 Suppress default date on front page
4959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4960 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4962 \begin_inset space ~
4970 \begin_layout Standard
4971 You can use footnotes to insert
4972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4979 or contact information.
4982 \begin_layout Subsection
4984 \begin_inset Index idx
4987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4996 name "subsec:Headings"
5003 \begin_layout Standard
5004 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5006 takes care of the numbering for you.
5009 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5011 \begin_inset Index idx
5014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5015 Section headings ! Numbered
5023 \begin_layout Standard
5024 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5028 \begin_layout Enumerate
5034 \begin_layout Enumerate
5040 \begin_layout Enumerate
5046 \begin_layout Enumerate
5052 \begin_layout Enumerate
5058 \begin_layout Enumerate
5064 \begin_layout Enumerate
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5072 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5073 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5074 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5077 \begin_layout Standard
5078 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5079 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5080 You group the book into chapters.
5082 does a similar grouping:
5085 \begin_layout Itemize
5090 is divided into either
5101 \begin_layout Itemize
5113 \begin_layout Itemize
5125 \begin_layout Itemize
5137 \begin_layout Itemize
5149 \begin_layout Itemize
5161 \begin_layout Standard
5162 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5170 Not all document types use the
5174 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5179 is the top-level heading.
5187 \begin_layout Standard
5192 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5193 labels it with its number,
5194 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5196 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5208 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5210 \begin_inset Index idx
5213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5214 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5222 \begin_layout Standard
5223 The unnumbered section headings have a
5224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5231 at the end of their name.
5232 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5233 the table of contents, see section
5234 \begin_inset space ~
5238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5247 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5248 Changing the Numbering
5249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5259 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5260 in the Table of Contents.
5261 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5263 Just as certain classes start with
5277 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5287 This is something you can change.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5297 \begin_inset Index idx
5300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5309 \begin_inset space ~
5313 \begin_inset space ~
5318 you will see two counters.
5323 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5324 numbers a section heading.
5325 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5330 Short Titles of Headings
5331 \begin_inset Index idx
5334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5335 Section headings ! Short titles
5341 \begin_inset Argument 1
5344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5353 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5361 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5362 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5363 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5364 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5367 \begin_layout Standard
5369 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5370 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5371 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5372 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5377 \begin_inset space ~
5383 This will insert a box labeled
5384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5388 \begin_inset space ~
5392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5395 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5396 This also works for captions inside floats.
5397 There can only be one short title per title.
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5404 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5408 \begin_layout Standard
5409 The following information applies to all section headings:
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5420 \begin_layout Itemize
5421 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5424 \begin_layout Itemize
5425 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5428 \begin_layout Subsection
5432 \begin_layout Standard
5434 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5448 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5449 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5450 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5451 the text they contain.
5452 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5460 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5463 \begin_layout Standard
5464 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5473 when you start a new paragraph.
5474 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5478 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5479 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5480 have to change back to the
5484 environment yourself.
5487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5496 \begin_inset Index idx
5499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5509 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5510 time for the differences.
5519 are identical except for one difference:
5523 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5532 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5535 \begin_layout Standard
5536 Here's an example of the
5549 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5551 See – no indentation!
5555 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5556 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5557 the other paragraph.
5560 \begin_layout Standard
5561 Here's another example, this time in the
5568 \begin_layout Quotation
5574 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5575 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5576 the first line, then
5580 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5584 you were quoting other text.
5587 \begin_layout Quotation
5588 Here's a new paragraph.
5589 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5590 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5593 \begin_layout Standard
5594 As the examples show,
5598 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5599 They should put quotes in the
5604 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5608 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5613 \begin_inset Index idx
5616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5623 \begin_inset Index idx
5626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5642 \begin_layout Standard
5647 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5653 \begin_inset Newline newline
5656 Which I did not rehearse!
5660 It could be much worse.
5661 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5663 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5664 indented a bit more than the first.
5665 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5671 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 And make things look fine
5675 \begin_inset Newline newline
5681 arg "newline-insert newline"
5687 \begin_layout Standard
5692 does not indent both margins.
5693 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5694 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5697 arg "newline-insert newline"
5703 \begin_layout Subsection
5705 \begin_inset Index idx
5708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5724 \begin_layout Standard
5726 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5736 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5737 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5746 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5747 lets you provide your own label.
5748 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5749 describing some general features of all four of them.
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5756 \begin_layout Standard
5757 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5759 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5760 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5769 reset the environment to
5773 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5774 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5775 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5779 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5783 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5790 \begin_layout Standard
5791 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5792 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5793 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5795 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5796 you read all of section
5797 \begin_inset space ~
5801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5803 reference "sec:Nesting"
5810 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5812 \begin_inset Index idx
5815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5831 \begin_layout Standard
5832 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5836 paragraph environment.
5837 It has the following properties:
5840 \begin_layout Itemize
5841 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5845 \begin_layout Itemize
5847 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5851 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5855 \begin_layout Itemize
5856 The items can have any length.
5858 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5859 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5871 environment inside another
5875 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5879 \begin_layout Itemize
5880 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5883 \begin_layout Itemize
5885 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5888 \begin_layout Itemize
5890 \begin_inset space ~
5894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5896 reference "sec:Nesting"
5900 for a full explanation of nesting.
5904 \begin_layout Standard
5905 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5914 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5917 \begin_layout Standard
5918 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5919 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5922 \begin_layout Itemize
5923 The label for the first level
5927 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5931 \begin_layout Itemize
5932 The label for the second level is a dash.
5936 \begin_layout Itemize
5937 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5941 \begin_layout Itemize
5942 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5946 \begin_layout Itemize
5947 Back out to the third level.
5951 \begin_layout Itemize
5952 Back to the second level.
5956 \begin_layout Itemize
5957 Back to the outermost level.
5960 \begin_layout Standard
5961 These are the default labels for an
5966 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5971 dialog in the submenu
5976 \begin_inset Index idx
5979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5985 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5989 \begin_layout Standard
5990 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5991 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5993 \begin_inset space ~
5997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5999 reference "sec:Nesting"
6006 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6008 \begin_inset Index idx
6011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6020 name "sec:Enumerate"
6027 \begin_layout Standard
6032 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6033 It has these properties:
6036 \begin_layout Enumerate
6037 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6041 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6046 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6056 environment resets the counter to one.
6059 \begin_layout Enumerate
6072 \begin_layout Enumerate
6073 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6074 Items can have any length.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6081 \begin_layout Enumerate
6082 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6085 \begin_layout Enumerate
6086 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6090 \begin_layout Standard
6099 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6101 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6102 labels the four different levels in an
6109 \begin_layout Enumerate
6110 The first level of an
6114 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6118 \begin_layout Enumerate
6119 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6124 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6128 \begin_layout Enumerate
6129 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6132 \begin_layout Enumerate
6133 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6138 \begin_layout Enumerate
6139 Back to the third level
6143 \begin_layout Enumerate
6144 Back to the second level.
6148 \begin_layout Enumerate
6149 Back to the outermost level.
6152 \begin_layout Standard
6153 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6157 environment, see section
6158 \begin_inset space ~
6162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6164 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6169 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6173 \begin_layout Standard
6174 There is more to nesting
6178 environments than we've stated here.
6179 You should read section
6180 \begin_inset space ~
6184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6186 reference "sec:Nesting"
6190 to learn more about nesting.
6193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6195 \begin_inset Index idx
6198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6207 \begin_layout Standard
6208 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6212 list has no fixed label.
6213 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6222 of the first line as the label.
6226 \begin_layout Description
6227 Example: This is an example of the
6234 \begin_layout Standard
6236 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6240 \begin_layout Standard
6242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6249 it is meant that the first usage of the
6253 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6255 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6263 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6269 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6277 \begin_inset space ~
6281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6283 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6287 for more information.) Here is an example:
6290 \begin_layout Description
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6295 Example: This one shows how to use a
6298 \begin_inset space ~
6310 \begin_layout Description
6311 Usage: You should use the
6315 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6316 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6318 It's not a good idea to use a
6322 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6323 You're better off using
6335 paragraphs into them.
6338 \begin_layout Description
6339 Nesting: You can nest
6343 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6347 \begin_layout Standard
6348 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6349 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6350 them from the first line.
6353 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6355 \begin_inset Index idx
6358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6367 \begin_layout Standard
6372 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6373 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6377 \begin_layout Standard
6386 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6388 Here are its properties:
6391 \begin_layout Labeling
6392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6394 \begin_inset space ~
6397 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6406 of each line as the item label.
6411 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6412 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6413 space as described above.
6416 \begin_layout Labeling
6417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6418 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6419 uses different margins for the item label and the
6420 body of the item text.
6421 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6422 label width plus a little extra space.
6426 \begin_layout Labeling
6427 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6429 \begin_inset space ~
6432 width \SpecialChar LyX
6433 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6434 If the label width is larger, the label
6435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6442 into the first line.
6443 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6444 margin of the rest of the item text.
6447 \begin_layout Labeling
6448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6450 \begin_inset space ~
6453 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6458 environment has the same left margin.
6459 \begin_inset Newline newline
6462 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6465 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6467 \begin_inset space ~
6472 dialog (toolbar button
6475 arg "layout-paragraph"
6482 \begin_inset space ~
6487 determines the default label width.
6488 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6497 multiple times instead.
6498 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6508 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6511 \begin_inset space ~
6516 every time you alter a label in a
6521 \begin_inset Newline newline
6524 The predefined default width is the length of
6525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6533 \begin_inset space ~
6539 \begin_layout Standard
6544 list the same way as the
6548 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6554 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6558 \begin_layout Standard
6563 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6564 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6566 \begin_inset space ~
6570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6572 reference "sec:Nesting"
6576 to learn about nesting.
6579 \begin_layout Standard
6580 There is yet another feature of the
6584 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6585 left-justifies the item labels by
6587 You can use additional
6591 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6592 justifies the item label.
6597 are documented in section
6598 \begin_inset space ~
6602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6604 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6609 Here are some examples:
6612 \begin_layout Labeling
6613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6614 Left The default for
6621 \begin_layout Labeling
6622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6623 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6630 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6633 \begin_layout Labeling
6634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6635 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6646 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6649 \begin_layout Subsection
6651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6653 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6658 \begin_inset Index idx
6661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6670 \begin_layout Standard
6671 The features described in this section require that the module
6673 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6675 is loaded in the document settings.
6676 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6682 \begin_inset Index idx
6685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6696 Custom Enumerate Lists
6697 \begin_inset Index idx
6700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6701 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6709 \begin_layout Standard
6711 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6714 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6717 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6718 There you add the command
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6729 \begin_layout Standard
6741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6742 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6743 Code, look at section
6744 \begin_inset space ~
6748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6750 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6763 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6770 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6771 For capital Roman numerals replace
6783 in the command above.
6784 For Arabic numerals use
6792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6799 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6816 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6824 You can only number 26
6825 \begin_inset space ~
6828 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6836 \begin_layout Standard
6837 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6838 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6841 \begin_layout Standard
6842 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6845 \begin_layout Enumerate
6846 \begin_inset Argument 1
6849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6876 \begin_inset Argument 1
6879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6902 \begin_layout Enumerate
6907 \begin_layout Enumerate
6908 \begin_inset Argument 1
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Enumerate
6936 \begin_inset Argument 1
6939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 \begin_layout Standard
6966 For this list these commands were used:
6969 \begin_layout Standard
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6996 \begin_inset Newline newline
7006 \begin_layout Standard
7013 makes the label emphasized and
7022 \begin_layout Standard
7023 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7031 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7032 lists until you change the definition.
7040 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7042 \begin_inset Index idx
7045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7046 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7054 \begin_layout Standard
7055 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7058 \begin_layout Enumerate
7059 \begin_inset Argument 1
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7081 \begin_inset Note Note
7084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7085 goes back to default numbering
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7101 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7105 \begin_layout Standard
7106 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7111 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7112 to indicate that it is a resumed
7113 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7114 , but in the output.
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7118 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7126 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7136 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7138 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7139 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7140 of a normal enumeration.
7141 There, insert the command
7144 \begin_layout Standard
7150 \begin_layout Standard
7155 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7159 \begin_layout Enumerate
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7167 \begin_layout Standard
7168 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7171 \begin_layout Enumerate
7172 \begin_inset Argument 1
7175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7191 This enumeration starts at 4
7194 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7196 \begin_inset Index idx
7199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7208 \begin_layout Standard
7209 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7211 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7214 \begin_layout Itemize
7218 \begin_layout Itemize
7219 with standard spacing
7222 \begin_layout Standard
7223 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7225 Add there the command
7229 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7232 \begin_layout Itemize
7233 \begin_inset Argument 1
7236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7255 \begin_layout Itemize
7259 \begin_layout Itemize
7263 \begin_layout Standard
7264 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7271 \begin_inset Index idx
7274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7282 For more information see its documentation,
7283 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7293 \begin_layout Standard
7294 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7296 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7297 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7301 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7304 \begin_layout Enumerate
7305 \begin_inset Argument 1
7308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7329 \begin_layout Enumerate
7330 with negative indentation
7333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7334 Further Customization
7335 \begin_inset Index idx
7338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7339 Lists ! Customization
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 You can also change the style of description lists.
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7358 \begin_layout Standard
7359 changes the description label font, the command
7362 \begin_layout Standard
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7369 sets the list style.
7372 \begin_layout Standard
7373 An example where the command
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7381 itshape, style=nextline
7384 \begin_layout Standard
7388 \begin_layout Description
7390 \begin_inset space ~
7394 \begin_inset Argument 1
7397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7403 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7405 itshape, style=nextline
7415 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7416 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7420 \begin_layout Description
7422 \begin_inset space ~
7425 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7426 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7427 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7430 \begin_layout Standard
7431 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7437 \begin_inset Index idx
7440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7448 For more information see its documentation
7449 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7459 \begin_layout Subsection
7461 \begin_inset Index idx
7464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7475 \begin_inset space ~
7478 Address: An Overview
7481 \begin_layout Standard
7482 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7483 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7491 \begin_inset space ~
7497 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7498 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7499 gags on the document.
7500 In contrast, you can use the
7507 \begin_inset space ~
7512 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7513 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7517 \begin_layout Standard
7518 Of course, you're not limited to using
7525 \begin_inset space ~
7534 \begin_inset space ~
7539 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7540 some European academic papers.
7543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7547 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7554 \begin_layout Standard
7559 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7560 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7564 \begin_inset space ~
7569 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7570 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7571 Here's an example of each:
7574 \begin_layout Right Address
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 \begin_inset Newline newline
7584 \begin_inset Newline newline
7587 When is it? What is today?
7590 \begin_layout Standard
7594 \begin_inset space ~
7600 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7602 the largest block of text on a single line.
7603 Here's an example of the
7610 \begin_layout Address
7612 \begin_inset Newline newline
7615 Where do I send this
7616 \begin_inset Newline newline
7619 Your post office and country
7622 \begin_layout Standard
7623 As you can see, both
7630 \begin_inset space ~
7635 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7640 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7641 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7647 This makes sense, since
7655 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7656 Thus, you have to use
7663 arg "newline-insert newline"
7668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7669 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7671 \begin_inset space ~
7675 \begin_inset space ~
7680 ) to start a new line in an
7687 \begin_inset space ~
7695 \begin_layout Subsection
7699 \begin_layout Standard
7700 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7701 or list of references.
7703 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7706 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7708 \begin_inset Index idx
7711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7720 \begin_layout Standard
7725 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7726 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7727 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7728 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7742 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7743 The book document classes ignores the
7747 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7751 in a letter document class.
7754 \begin_layout Standard
7759 environment does several things for you.
7760 First, it puts the centered label
7761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7769 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7771 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7772 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7773 the subsequent text.
7774 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7776 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7780 \begin_layout Standard
7781 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7785 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7786 The new paragraph will still be in the
7791 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7792 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7795 \begin_layout Standard
7796 \begin_inset Float figure
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Graphics
7806 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7814 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7819 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 We would love to demonstrate the
7845 environment, but since this document is in the
7846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7853 class, we can't do this.
7854 We inserted it therefore as figure
7855 \begin_inset space ~
7859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7861 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7866 If you have never heard of an
7867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7874 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7879 \begin_inset Index idx
7882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7891 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7898 \begin_layout Standard
7903 environment is used to list references.
7904 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7905 only use it at the end of the document.
7917 \begin_layout Standard
7918 When you first open a
7922 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7923 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7939 depending on the document class.
7940 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7941 Each paragraph of the
7945 environment is a bibliography entry.
7950 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7951 Each new paragraph is still in the
7958 \begin_layout Standard
7959 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7960 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7962 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7964 handling, have a look at section
7965 \begin_inset space ~
7969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7971 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7978 \begin_layout Subsection
7979 Special Environments
7982 \begin_layout Standard
7984 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7985 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7988 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7993 \begin_inset Index idx
7996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8006 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8013 \begin_layout Standard
8019 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8021 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8026 key as a fixed whitespace.
8030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8043 \begin_inset space ~
8048 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8066 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8069 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8072 arg "newline-insert newline"
8089 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8090 So, when you finish using the
8095 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8096 Also, you can nest the
8101 environment inside of others.
8104 \begin_layout Standard
8105 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8108 \begin_layout Itemize
8112 arg "newline-insert newline"
8115 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8120 \begin_inset space \space{}
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8136 \begin_layout Itemize
8140 arg "newline-insert newline"
8150 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8156 \begin_layout Itemize
8157 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8158 You must put at least one
8162 in any line you want blank.
8163 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8167 \begin_layout Itemize
8168 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8172 since that will insert
8177 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8180 arg "self-insert \""
8186 \begin_layout Standard
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 printf("Hello World!
8212 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8216 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8220 \begin_layout Standard
8221 This is just the standard
8222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8233 \begin_layout Standard
8239 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8241 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8242 as if you used a typewriter.
8243 \begin_inset Index idx
8246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8247 Paragraph environments|)
8252 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8255 Program Code Listings
8260 \begin_inset space ~
8268 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8272 \begin_inset Index idx
8275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8284 \begin_layout Standard
8289 environment is similar to the
8294 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8295 computer console text.
8300 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8314 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8315 you can have empty lines.
8328 \begin_layout Itemize
8329 have a certain language and a text style
8332 \begin_layout Itemize
8333 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8334 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8335 and \SpecialChar TeX
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8340 Because of these properties
8344 works like a typewriter.
8348 \begin_layout Verbatim
8352 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 The following 2 lines are empty:
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim
8362 \begin_layout Verbatim
8366 \begin_layout Verbatim
8367 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8372 \begin_layout Standard
8377 environment is identical to
8381 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8382 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8389 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8393 \begin_layout Section
8394 Nesting Environments
8395 \begin_inset Index idx
8398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8399 Nesting ! Environments
8405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8414 \begin_layout Subsection
8418 \begin_layout Standard
8420 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8422 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8424 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8426 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8438 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8447 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Enumerate
8456 \begin_layout Enumerate
8460 \begin_layout Standard
8461 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8462 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8464 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8466 \begin_inset space ~
8470 \begin_inset space ~
8478 \begin_inset space ~
8482 \begin_inset space ~
8487 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8489 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8492 arg "depth-increment"
8498 arg "depth-decrement"
8512 arg "depth-increment"
8518 arg "depth-decrement"
8522 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8523 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8527 \begin_layout Standard
8528 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8529 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8530 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8531 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8532 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8535 \begin_layout Standard
8536 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8538 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8540 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8543 \begin_layout Subsection
8544 What You Can and Can't Nest
8547 \begin_layout Standard
8548 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8549 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8552 \begin_layout Standard
8553 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8554 than a simple yes or no.
8555 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8558 \begin_layout Itemize
8559 Completely unnestable
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8567 \begin_layout Itemize
8568 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8572 \begin_layout Standard
8573 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8574 environments have them:
8577 \begin_layout Description
8578 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8579 Can't nest into them.
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8607 \begin_layout Itemize
8614 \begin_layout Description
8616 \begin_inset space ~
8619 Nestable You can nest them.
8620 You can nest other things into them.
8624 \begin_layout Itemize
8630 \begin_layout Itemize
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8679 \begin_layout Itemize
8686 \begin_layout Description
8687 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8688 You can't nest anything into them.
8692 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_layout Itemize
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8774 \begin_inset space ~
8780 \begin_layout Itemize
8787 \begin_layout Standard
8788 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8796 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8806 \begin_inset space ~
8809 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8810 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8811 nested section headings violate this.
8819 \begin_layout Subsection
8820 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8821 \begin_inset Index idx
8824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8825 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8833 \begin_layout Standard
8834 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8835 affected by nesting anyhow.
8839 \begin_layout Itemize
8843 \begin_layout Itemize
8847 \begin_layout Itemize
8851 \begin_layout Standard
8853 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8861 Figures and tables in
8865 are not affected by this.
8870 Have a look at section
8871 \begin_inset space ~
8875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8877 reference "sec:Floats"
8881 for more information about
8888 \begin_layout Standard
8890 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8891 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8904 of its own, it behaves just like a
8905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8912 paragraph environment.
8913 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8917 \begin_layout Standard
8918 Here's an example with a table:
8921 \begin_layout Enumerate
8926 \begin_layout Enumerate
8927 This is (a) and it's nested.
8931 \begin_layout Standard
8932 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8938 \begin_layout Standard
8940 \begin_inset Tabular
8941 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8942 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8943 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8944 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9036 \begin_layout Enumerate
9038 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9042 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 \begin_layout Standard
9047 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9050 \begin_layout Enumerate
9055 \begin_layout Enumerate
9056 This is (a) and it's nested.
9060 \begin_layout Standard
9061 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9067 \begin_layout Standard
9069 \begin_inset Tabular
9070 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9071 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9072 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9157 \begin_layout Standard
9158 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9171 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9174 \begin_layout Enumerate
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9179 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9183 \begin_layout Standard
9184 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9187 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9195 \begin_layout Enumerate
9196 This is (a) and it's nested.
9199 \begin_layout Standard
9200 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9206 \begin_layout Standard
9208 \begin_inset Tabular
9209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9210 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9298 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9304 \begin_layout Enumerate
9306 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9313 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 \begin_layout Standard
9318 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9324 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9325 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9329 \begin_layout Subsection
9330 Usage and General Features
9333 \begin_layout Standard
9334 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9335 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9344 is the innermost possible depth.
9345 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9349 level #1 – outermost
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Enumerate
9363 \begin_layout Enumerate
9368 \begin_layout Itemize
9373 \begin_layout Itemize
9382 \begin_layout Standard
9383 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9384 both of them in the example.
9385 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9395 For example, if we tried to nest another
9400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9407 , we would get errors.
9410 \begin_layout Subsection
9412 \begin_inset Index idx
9415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9424 \begin_layout Standard
9425 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9426 We have several examples of nested environments.
9427 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9431 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9432 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9435 \begin_layout Labeling
9436 \labelwidthstring MMM
9437 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9446 \begin_layout Labeling
9447 \labelwidthstring MMM
9448 #2-a This is level #2.
9449 We created it by using
9452 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9458 arg "depth-increment"
9465 \begin_layout Labeling
9466 \labelwidthstring MMM
9467 #3-a This is level #3.
9468 This time, we just enter
9475 arg "depth-increment"
9479 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9483 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9489 arg "depth-increment"
9496 \begin_layout Standard
9501 environment, nested inside of
9502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9510 So, it's at level #4.
9511 We did this by entering
9514 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9520 arg "depth-increment"
9523 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9528 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9544 \begin_layout Standard
9549 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9552 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9558 \begin_layout Labeling
9559 \labelwidthstring MMM
9560 #4-a This is level #4.
9564 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9567 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9572 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9576 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9581 keep nesting things inside
9582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9593 \begin_layout Labeling
9594 \labelwidthstring MMM
9595 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9600 \begin_layout Labeling
9601 \labelwidthstring MMM
9602 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9603 and this is level #6.
9604 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9608 \begin_layout Labeling
9609 \labelwidthstring MMM
9610 #5-b Back to level #5.
9614 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9620 arg "depth-decrement"
9627 \begin_layout Labeling
9628 \labelwidthstring MMM
9632 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9638 arg "depth-decrement"
9641 , we're back at level #4.
9645 \begin_layout Labeling
9646 \labelwidthstring MMM
9647 #3-b Back to level #3.
9648 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9652 \begin_layout Labeling
9653 \labelwidthstring MMM
9654 #2-b Back to level #2.
9659 \begin_layout Labeling
9660 \labelwidthstring MMM
9661 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9662 After this sentence, we will enter
9666 and change the paragraph environment back to
9673 \begin_layout Standard
9674 We could have also used the
9690 environment in place of the
9695 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9699 Example 2: Inheritance
9702 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9703 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9706 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9715 arg "depth-increment"
9719 \begin_inset Newline newline
9722 which, we will change to the
9730 \begin_layout Enumerate
9735 environment, at level #2.
9738 \begin_layout Enumerate
9739 Notice how the nested
9743 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9747 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9751 \begin_layout Standard
9752 We ended this example by entering
9757 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9761 and reset the nesting depth by using
9764 arg "depth-decrement"
9770 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9771 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9780 \begin_inset Argument 1
9783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9784 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9792 \begin_layout Enumerate
9793 This is level #1, in an
9797 paragraph environment.
9798 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9802 \begin_layout Enumerate
9807 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9813 arg "depth-increment"
9817 Now, what happens if we nest an
9821 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9822 label be? An asterisk?
9826 \begin_layout Itemize
9836 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9837 So, its label is a bullet.
9838 (We got here by using
9841 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9847 arg "depth-increment"
9850 , then changing the environment to
9858 \begin_layout Itemize
9859 Here's level #4, produced using
9862 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9868 arg "depth-increment"
9872 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9877 \begin_layout Enumerate
9880 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9885 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9889 , because we are in the
9897 environment (that is, it is an
9912 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9918 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9922 \begin_layout Enumerate
9923 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9926 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9929 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9932 \begin_layout Enumerate
9936 arg "depth-decrement"
9939 to decrease the depth after the next
9942 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9949 \begin_layout Enumerate
9951 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9956 \begin_layout Enumerate
9958 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9959 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9963 \begin_layout Enumerate
9964 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9973 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9978 reset the counter for the label.
9982 \begin_layout Enumerate
9986 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9992 arg "depth-decrement"
9995 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9996 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9997 into the twofold-nested
10005 \begin_layout Enumerate
10006 The same thing happens if we do another
10009 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10015 arg "depth-decrement"
10018 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10021 \begin_layout Standard
10022 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10027 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10038 The number of other
10042 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10049 The same rule applies for the
10053 environment, as well.
10056 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10057 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10060 \begin_layout Enumerate
10061 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10062 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10063 the same detail with how we did it.
10072 \begin_layout Standard
10080 arg "depth-increment"
10087 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10088 the example in parentheses someplace.
10089 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10090 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10091 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10095 \begin_layout Enumerate
10100 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10104 \begin_layout Verse
10105 Now we will add verse.
10106 \begin_inset Newline newline
10109 It will get much worse.
10110 \begin_inset Newline newline
10120 arg "depth-increment"
10130 \begin_layout Verse
10131 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10132 \begin_inset Newline newline
10135 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10136 \begin_inset Newline newline
10142 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10150 \begin_layout Verse
10151 Here comes a table:
10155 \begin_layout Standard
10156 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10162 \begin_layout Standard
10164 \begin_inset Tabular
10165 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10166 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10167 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10253 \begin_layout Verse
10257 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10267 arg "depth-increment"
10273 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10279 \begin_inset Newline newline
10287 arg "depth-decrement"
10294 \begin_layout Enumerate
10299 : level #1) This is another item.
10300 Note that selecting a
10304 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10305 3 times to put the table inside the
10313 \begin_layout Quotation
10314 We're now ending the
10318 list and changing to
10323 We're still at level #1.
10324 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10325 The next set of paragraphs is a
10326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10333 We will nest both the
10340 \begin_inset space ~
10345 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10349 for the letter body.
10353 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10356 to preserve the depth.
10357 Remember that you need to use
10360 arg "newline-insert newline"
10363 to create multiple lines inside the
10370 \begin_inset space ~
10380 \begin_layout Right Address
10382 \begin_inset Newline newline
10385 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10386 \begin_inset Newline newline
10392 \begin_layout Address
10394 \begin_inset space ~
10400 \begin_layout Quotation
10401 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10405 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10406 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10407 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10408 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10409 as soon as possible.
10410 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10413 \begin_layout Quotation
10414 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10415 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10416 with your order, along with payment.
10419 \begin_layout Quotation
10420 We thank you again for your patience.
10423 \begin_layout Address
10425 \begin_inset Newline newline
10432 \begin_layout Quotation
10433 That ends that example!
10436 \begin_layout Standard
10437 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10438 gives you a lot of power with just
10440 We could have easily nested an
10461 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10464 \begin_layout Subsection
10466 \begin_inset Index idx
10469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10470 Nesting ! Separation
10476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10478 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10485 \begin_layout Standard
10486 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10488 For example you need two different enumerations:
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Enumerate
10501 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_layout Standard
10506 \begin_inset Separator plain
10512 \begin_layout Itemize
10518 \begin_layout Standard
10519 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10525 \begin_layout Enumerate
10529 \begin_layout Enumerate
10533 \begin_layout Enumerate
10537 \begin_layout Standard
10538 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10539 list item and use the menu
10541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10542 Separated <Name> Above
10546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10547 Separated <Name> Below
10550 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10551 ) and before or behind it the
10553 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10556 \begin_layout Standard
10557 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10558 (red arrow in LyX).
10559 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10560 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10563 \begin_layout Standard
10564 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10567 arg "paragraph-break"
10574 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10577 \begin_layout Section
10578 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10579 \begin_inset Index idx
10582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10591 \begin_layout Standard
10592 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10593 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10595 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10596 be broken at the end of a line.
10597 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10601 \begin_layout Subsection
10603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10605 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10610 \begin_inset Index idx
10613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10622 \begin_layout Standard
10623 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10624 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10625 ) not to break the line at
10627 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10630 \begin_layout Quote
10631 Further documentation is given in section
10632 \begin_inset Newline newline
10636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10638 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10646 \begin_layout Standard
10647 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10662 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10671 A protected space is set with
10673 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10674 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10676 \begin_inset space ~
10684 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10690 \begin_layout Subsection
10692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10694 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10699 \begin_inset Index idx
10702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10703 Spacing ! Horizontal
10711 \begin_layout Standard
10712 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10714 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10715 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10719 The length units are listed in Appendix
10720 \begin_inset space ~
10724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10726 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10733 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10737 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10742 \begin_inset Index idx
10745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10746 Spaces ! Inter-word
10754 \begin_layout Standard
10755 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10756 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10757 at the ends of sentences.
10758 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10759 automatically takes care about this.
10760 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10761 followed by a period; see section
10762 \begin_inset space ~
10766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10768 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10773 To insert a normal space, select
10775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10776 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10778 \begin_inset space ~
10786 arg "space-insert normal"
10792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10796 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10801 \begin_inset Index idx
10804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10813 \begin_layout Standard
10815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10822 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10831 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10832 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10833 inside abbreviations:
10836 \begin_layout Quote
10838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10842 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10845 \begin_layout Standard
10846 or between values and units.
10847 Compare for example this:
10848 \begin_inset Newline newline
10852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10856 \begin_inset Newline newline
10859 10 kg (normal space
10862 \begin_layout Standard
10863 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10865 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10866 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10868 \begin_inset space ~
10876 arg "space-insert thin"
10882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10886 \begin_layout Standard
10887 You can also insert the following space types:
10890 \begin_layout Description
10892 \begin_inset space ~
10896 \begin_inset space ~
10899 space A line with a
10900 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10904 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10908 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10911 negative thin space between the arrows.
10914 \begin_layout Description
10916 \begin_inset space ~
10920 \begin_inset space ~
10923 space A line with a
10924 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10928 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10932 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10935 negative medium space between the arrows.
10938 \begin_layout Description
10940 \begin_inset space ~
10944 \begin_inset space ~
10947 space A line with a
10948 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10952 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10956 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10959 negative thick space between the arrows.
10962 \begin_layout Description
10964 \begin_inset space ~
10968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10972 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10976 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10980 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10984 \begin_inset space ~
10988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10991 em) space between the arrows.
10994 \begin_layout Description
10996 \begin_inset space ~
11000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11004 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11008 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11012 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11016 \begin_inset space ~
11020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11023 em) space between the arrows.
11026 \begin_layout Description
11028 \begin_inset space ~
11032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11036 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11040 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11044 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11048 \begin_inset space ~
11052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11055 em) space between the arrows.
11058 \begin_layout Description
11060 \begin_inset space ~
11064 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11068 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11073 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11080 cm space between the arrows.
11083 \begin_layout Standard
11085 \begin_inset space ~
11089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11091 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11095 lists the different space sizes.
11098 \begin_layout Standard
11099 \begin_inset Float table
11106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11107 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11112 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11116 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11126 \begin_inset Tabular
11127 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11128 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11129 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11130 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11246 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11405 \begin_inset Index idx
11408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11417 \begin_layout Standard
11418 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11419 feature for adding extra space
11420 in a uniform fashion.
11421 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11422 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11423 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11424 equally between themselves.
11427 \begin_layout Standard
11428 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11431 \begin_layout Quote
11433 This is on the left side
11434 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 This is on the right
11440 \begin_layout Quote
11443 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_layout Quote
11456 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11460 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11464 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11470 \begin_layout Standard
11471 That was an example in the
11477 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11481 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11485 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11488 is one in a standard paragraph.
11489 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11493 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11496 \begin_layout Standard
11497 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11500 \begin_inset space ~
11505 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11508 \begin_layout Standard
11510 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11514 \begin_inset space ~
11520 \begin_layout Standard
11522 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11526 \begin_inset space ~
11532 \begin_layout Standard
11534 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11538 \begin_inset space ~
11544 \begin_layout Standard
11546 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11550 \begin_inset space ~
11556 \begin_layout Standard
11558 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11562 \begin_inset space ~
11568 \begin_layout Standard
11570 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11574 \begin_inset space ~
11580 \begin_layout Standard
11581 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11589 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11593 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11595 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11596 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11600 option in the space dialog.
11608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11612 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11617 \begin_inset Index idx
11620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11629 \begin_layout Standard
11630 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11631 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11634 \begin_layout Standard
11635 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11638 What is correct English?:
11639 \begin_inset Newline newline
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11647 \begin_inset space ~
11650 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11651 \begin_inset Newline newline
11655 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11666 \begin_inset Newline newline
11670 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11681 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11687 \begin_layout Standard
11689 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11694 \begin_inset space ~
11698 \begin_inset space ~
11702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11706 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11709 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11713 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11719 \begin_inset space ~
11723 \begin_inset space ~
11727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11730 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11739 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11740 That is why it is named
11741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11749 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11750 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11754 \begin_layout Subsection
11756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11758 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11763 \begin_inset Index idx
11766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11775 \begin_layout Standard
11776 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11779 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11781 \begin_inset space ~
11787 There you find the following sizes:
11790 \begin_layout Standard
11803 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11804 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11809 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11811 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11812 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11814 \begin_inset space ~
11820 \begin_inset Index idx
11823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11824 Document ! Settings
11829 for the paragraph separation.
11830 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11841 \begin_layout Standard
11847 \begin_inset Index idx
11850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11856 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11857 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11862 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11863 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11872 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11881 s are described in section
11882 \begin_inset space ~
11886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11888 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11897 If there are several
11901 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11902 You can therefore use
11906 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11909 \begin_layout Standard
11914 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11915 \begin_inset space ~
11919 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11921 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11928 \begin_layout Standard
11929 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11939 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11940 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11952 \begin_layout Subsection
11953 Paragraph Alignment
11954 \begin_inset Index idx
11957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11958 Paragraph ! Alignment
11966 \begin_layout Standard
11967 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11969 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11972 dialog (toolbar button
11975 arg "layout-paragraph"
11979 There are five possibilities:
11982 \begin_layout Itemize
11990 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11996 \begin_layout Itemize
12004 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12010 \begin_layout Itemize
12018 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12024 \begin_layout Itemize
12032 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12038 \begin_layout Itemize
12046 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12053 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12054 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12055 the left and right margins.
12056 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12061 This paragraph is right aligned,
12064 \begin_layout Standard
12066 this one is centered,
12069 \begin_layout Standard
12071 this one is left aligned.
12074 \begin_layout Subsection
12076 \begin_inset Index idx
12079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12080 Page breaks ! Forced
12086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12088 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12095 \begin_layout Standard
12096 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12097 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12098 force a page break where you want one.
12099 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12100 is good at page breaking.
12101 Only if you use a lot of
12105 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12106 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12109 \begin_layout Standard
12110 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12111 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12115 have to change the page breaking.
12118 \begin_layout Standard
12119 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12121 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12124 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 \begin_inset space ~
12132 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12135 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12137 \begin_inset space ~
12142 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12144 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12145 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12148 \begin_layout Standard
12149 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12150 at the top of a page.
12151 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12153 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12154 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12155 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12159 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12163 to learn more about
12170 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12174 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12179 \begin_inset Index idx
12182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12183 Page breaks ! Clear
12191 \begin_layout Standard
12192 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12193 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12194 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12195 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12196 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12199 \begin_layout Standard
12200 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 \begin_inset space ~
12211 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12214 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12216 \begin_inset space ~
12220 \begin_inset space ~
12225 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12226 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12229 \begin_layout Subsection
12231 \begin_inset Index idx
12234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12243 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12250 \begin_layout Standard
12251 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12253 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12256 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12258 \begin_inset space ~
12262 \begin_inset space ~
12270 arg "newline-insert newline"
12274 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12277 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12279 \begin_inset space ~
12283 \begin_inset space ~
12291 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12294 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12296 This is useful to avoid
12297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12304 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12307 \begin_layout Standard
12308 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12309 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12311 very good at line breaking.
12312 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12313 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12314 \begin_inset space ~
12318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12320 reference "sec:Quote"
12325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12327 reference "sec:Verse"
12332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12334 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12341 \begin_layout Subsection
12343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12345 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12350 \begin_inset Index idx
12353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12362 \begin_layout Standard
12364 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12375 \begin_layout Standard
12379 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12380 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12382 \begin_inset space ~
12387 you can insert horizontal lines.
12388 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12389 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12390 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12393 \begin_layout Standard
12395 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12406 \begin_layout Section
12407 Characters and Symbols
12410 \begin_layout Standard
12411 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12412 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12413 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12421 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12425 for information on how this is done.
12428 \begin_layout Standard
12429 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12434 dialog via the menu
12436 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12437 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12443 \begin_layout Standard
12444 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12452 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12453 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12455 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12463 \begin_layout Section
12464 Fonts and Text Styles
12465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12467 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12474 \begin_layout Subsection
12476 \begin_inset Index idx
12479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12488 \begin_layout Standard
12489 There are two types of fonts:
12492 \begin_layout Description
12494 \begin_inset space ~
12498 \begin_inset Index idx
12501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12507 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12512 characters) in the font.
12513 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12514 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12515 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12516 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12517 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12518 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12519 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12520 \begin_inset Newline newline
12523 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12524 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12525 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12526 sizes than at small ones.
12527 \begin_inset Newline newline
12541 \begin_inset space ~
12549 \begin_layout Description
12551 \begin_inset space ~
12555 \begin_inset Index idx
12558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12564 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12565 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12566 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12567 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12568 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12569 image manipulation program.
12570 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12571 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12572 \begin_inset space ~
12575 pixels high up to 34
12576 \begin_inset space ~
12579 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12580 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12581 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12583 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12584 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12585 \begin_inset Newline newline
12588 Bitmap fonts are named
12591 \begin_inset space ~
12596 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12599 \begin_layout Standard
12600 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12601 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12602 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12603 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12604 use scalable fonts.
12607 \begin_layout Standard
12608 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12611 \begin_layout Standard
12612 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12614 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12616 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12619 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12620 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12621 font to emphasize text, you use an
12622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12630 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12632 In \SpecialChar LyX
12633 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12637 \begin_layout Subsection
12640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12642 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12649 \begin_layout Standard
12650 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 used its own fonts.
12652 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12653 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12656 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12657 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12658 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12659 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12660 to a word processor.
12661 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12662 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12663 files are very portable across
12664 different machines.
12665 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12666 has increased a lot
12667 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12670 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12672 \begin_inset space ~
12676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12678 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12683 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12684 code in the document
12685 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12688 \begin_layout Standard
12689 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12690 engines that are also able directly
12691 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12693 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12695 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12697 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12698 that is installed on your system.
12699 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12702 \begin_layout Standard
12703 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12711 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12712 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12720 \begin_layout Subsection
12721 Document Font and Font size
12722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12724 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12729 \begin_inset Index idx
12732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12739 \begin_inset Index idx
12742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12751 \begin_layout Standard
12752 You can set the document fonts in the
12754 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12758 \begin_inset Index idx
12761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12762 Document ! Settings
12772 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12773 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12776 \begin_inset space ~
12785 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12787 \begin_inset space ~
12790 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12793 \begin_layout Standard
12798 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12799 This requires that you use
12811 as the output format, i.
12812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12816 \begin_inset space \space{}
12819 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12820 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12821 installed (see section
12822 \begin_inset space ~
12826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12828 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12833 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12835 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12836 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12838 \begin_inset space ~
12841 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12842 cannot determine the family.
12843 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12844 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12847 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12850 \begin_layout Standard
12851 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12852 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12857 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12863 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12865 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12867 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12870 font encoding, this is
12871 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12872 , depending on the document language,
12875 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12876 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12884 \begin_inset space ~
12890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12900 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12901 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12909 \begin_inset space ~
12915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12923 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
12927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12944 European Computer Modern
12947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12955 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12958 \begin_layout Standard
12963 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12964 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12969 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12972 \begin_inset space ~
12977 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12983 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12984 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12987 \begin_layout Itemize
12991 \begin_inset space ~
12996 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13009 \begin_inset space ~
13014 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13015 community in order to replace
13019 as the default font.
13020 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13021 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13024 \begin_inset space ~
13037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13038 One difference is improved kerning.
13046 \begin_layout Itemize
13047 If you do not like the look of
13055 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13060 \begin_inset space ~
13066 \begin_inset space ~
13076 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13077 \begin_inset space ~
13080 serif and typewriter fonts,
13084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13085 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13092 \begin_inset space ~
13101 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13106 \begin_inset space \space{}
13114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13118 \begin_inset space \space{}
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13142 but you can also select your own.
13143 \begin_inset Newline newline
13146 The differences between roman,
13149 \begin_inset space ~
13158 fonts are explained in section
13159 \begin_inset space ~
13163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13165 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13170 \begin_inset Newline newline
13176 \begin_inset space ~
13181 was originally designed for newspapers.
13182 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13183 into the small newspaper columns.
13187 \begin_inset space ~
13192 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13195 \begin_layout Standard
13196 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13209 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13214 depends on the class you are using.
13215 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13218 \begin_layout Standard
13219 Note that the font size is the
13224 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13225 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13226 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13227 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13230 \begin_inset space ~
13236 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13237 \begin_inset space ~
13241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13243 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13250 \begin_layout Standard
13254 \begin_inset space ~
13259 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13261 \begin_inset space ~
13264 serif or typewriter.
13269 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13279 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13282 \begin_layout Standard
13287 LaTeX font encoding
13289 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13290 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13296 \begin_inset Index idx
13299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13307 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13309 \begin_inset space ~
13313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13315 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13322 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13323 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13324 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13328 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13336 \begin_layout Standard
13337 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13339 Use Old Style Figures
13343 Use True Small Caps
13346 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13349 Use Old Style Figures
13351 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13353 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13361 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13365 Use True Small Caps
13367 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13368 of scaled capitals.
13369 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13370 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13373 \begin_layout Standard
13378 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13379 a font to display the script characters.
13383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13384 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13390 \begin_inset Index idx
13393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13400 So this has no effect for the document language
13416 \begin_layout Standard
13419 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13421 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13422 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13428 \begin_inset Index idx
13431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13433 packages ! microtype
13442 \begin_layout Standard
13445 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13447 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13452 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13453 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13459 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13460 \begin_inset space ~
13464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13466 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13476 \begin_layout Standard
13477 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13481 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13489 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13494 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13495 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13497 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13499 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13502 dialog, see section
13503 \begin_inset space ~
13507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13509 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13521 \begin_layout Subsection
13525 \begin_layout Standard
13526 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13527 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13529 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13530 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13531 choose a math font in the dialog
13533 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13537 \begin_inset Index idx
13540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13541 Document ! Settings
13547 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13548 automatically selects a math font.
13549 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13550 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13559 \begin_inset space ~
13565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13570 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13571 document font is available.
13574 \begin_layout Standard
13575 Note that the math font will not be used for
13579 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13585 or by the insertion of the command
13592 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13593 \begin_inset space ~
13597 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13598 while the math characters do not.
13600 \begin_inset space ~
13603 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13606 \begin_inset space ~
13614 \begin_inset space ~
13619 in the document font settings.
13622 \begin_layout Standard
13623 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13624 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13625 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13626 font (in most cases
13627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13633 \begin_inset space ~
13639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13642 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13643 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13651 \begin_inset space ~
13657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13663 \begin_layout Subsection
13665 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13667 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13675 name "subsec:charstyles"
13682 \begin_inset Index idx
13685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13692 \begin_inset Index idx
13695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13704 \begin_layout Standard
13705 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13706 automatically changes the
13707 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13710 style for certain paragraph environments.
13712 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13713 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13715 This is where we meet the concept of
13721 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13723 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13727 \begin_layout Standard
13729 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13734 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13749 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13758 e., available with all document classes.
13759 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13763 for specific purposes.
13764 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13767 \begin_layout Standard
13769 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13770 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13780 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13784 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13797 — you customized the
13802 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13803 among them, encourage the use of
13815 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13816 \begin_inset space ~
13820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13822 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13827 Rather than fiddling with
13831 , they encourage the use of
13835 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13840 \begin_inset Quotes els
13844 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13847 ), not their form (
13848 \begin_inset Quotes els
13852 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13856 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13857 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13858 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13859 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13860 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13861 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13867 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13871 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13872 With a semantic markup (such as
13876 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13881 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13883 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13884 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13887 \begin_layout Standard
13889 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
13890 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
13891 by \SpecialChar LyX
13897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13899 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
13900 Builtin Text Styles
13901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13903 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13910 \begin_layout Standard
13912 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
13913 The two builtin text styles can be
13914 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
13918 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
13922 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
13923 both of these styles
13926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
13934 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
13940 \begin_layout Standard
13945 style, do one of the following:
13948 \begin_layout Itemize
13949 click on the toolbar button
13958 \begin_layout Itemize
13959 use the key binding
13966 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
13970 \begin_layout Itemize
13972 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
13980 arg "dialog-show character"
13986 arg "dialog-show character"
13989 ) as described in section
13990 \begin_inset space ~
13994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13996 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14005 \begin_layout Standard
14006 These commands are all toggles.
14011 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14014 \begin_layout Standard
14015 One typically uses the
14019 style for proper names.
14021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14028 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14034 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14038 \begin_layout Standard
14040 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14045 is producing text in
14049 , but the definition can be changed.
14054 \begin_layout Standard
14056 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14058 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14066 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14073 \begin_layout Itemize
14074 clicking on the toolbar button
14083 \begin_layout Itemize
14084 using the keybindings
14091 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14095 \begin_layout Itemize
14097 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14105 arg "dialog-show character"
14111 arg "dialog-show character"
14114 ) as described in section
14115 \begin_inset space ~
14119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14121 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14130 \begin_layout Standard
14135 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14137 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14139 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14142 packages use a different font
14143 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14144 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14150 \begin_layout Standard
14151 We've been using the
14155 style all over the place in this document.
14156 Here's one more example:
14159 \begin_layout Quotation
14163 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14165 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14171 \begin_layout Standard
14172 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14173 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14174 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14175 the common tendency to overuse
14176 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14178 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14183 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14187 \begin_layout Standard
14189 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14190 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14191 only as font changes and integrated in the
14199 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14202 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14209 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14211 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14215 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14218 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14220 \begin_inset space ~
14223 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14231 arg "dialog-show character"
14237 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14239 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14245 arg "dialog-show character"
14249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14255 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14259 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14266 \begin_layout Standard
14268 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14269 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14271 \begin_inset space ~
14275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14277 reference "subsec:Modules"
14284 ), or local layout settings (see section
14285 \begin_inset space ~
14289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14291 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14296 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14300 markup for specific functions.
14301 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14306 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14316 \begin_inset Quotes els
14320 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14326 \begin_layout Standard
14328 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14329 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14331 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14337 \begin_layout Standard
14339 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14340 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14345 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14346 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14347 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14352 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14353 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14358 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14366 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14367 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14368 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14369 \begin_inset Flex Code
14372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14374 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14383 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14388 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14397 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14402 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14411 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14412 on screen their formal appearance.
14417 \begin_layout Subsection
14419 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14421 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14425 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14431 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14433 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14439 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14441 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14445 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14447 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14452 \begin_inset Index idx
14455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14464 \begin_layout Standard
14465 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14466 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14469 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14471 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14473 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14477 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14478 the properties of text passages
14479 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14483 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14484 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14485 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14486 from ordinary dialog.
14487 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14491 \begin_layout Standard
14493 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14494 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14495 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14496 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14497 the properties of the respective text passages.
14502 comes in as a last resort.
14507 \begin_layout Standard
14508 Before we document how to
14509 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14510 use custom character style
14511 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14512 tweak the text properties
14514 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14515 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14517 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14521 \begin_inset Newline newline
14524 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14525 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14528 \begin_layout Standard
14530 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14531 use custom character styles
14532 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14533 tweak text properties
14536 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14541 \begin_inset space ~
14544 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14546 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14552 arg "dialog-show character"
14557 dialog or press the toolbar button
14560 arg "dialog-show character"
14565 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14568 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14569 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14571 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14574 property that you can choose.
14575 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14578 \begin_inset space ~
14583 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14585 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14589 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14591 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14596 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14597 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14598 environments all at once.
14601 \begin_layout Standard
14603 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14605 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14608 properties, and their options (in addition to
14611 \begin_inset space ~
14617 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14621 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14629 \begin_layout Labeling
14630 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14644 The possible options are:
14648 \begin_layout Labeling
14649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14654 This is the Roman font family.
14655 Normally a serif font.
14656 It's also the default family.
14666 \begin_layout Labeling
14667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14671 \begin_inset space ~
14678 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14690 \begin_layout Labeling
14691 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14698 This is the Typewriter font family.
14704 arg "font-typewriter"
14710 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14714 \begin_layout Standard
14716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14717 The general differences of these families are:
14720 \begin_layout Itemize
14722 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14727 fonts use characters with serifs.
14728 These are the small
14729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14736 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14737 The following example shows the difference:
14738 \begin_inset Newline newline
14742 \begin_inset Newline newline
14747 text without serifs
14750 \begin_inset Newline newline
14753 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14754 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14761 \begin_layout Itemize
14763 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14768 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14769 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14770 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14773 \begin_layout Itemize
14775 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14788 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14806 \begin_inset Newline newline
14810 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14815 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14826 \begin_inset Note Note
14829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14831 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14832 For more on phantoms see section
14833 \begin_inset space ~
14837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14839 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14849 \begin_inset Newline newline
14858 \begin_layout Labeling
14859 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14864 This corresponds to the print weight.
14869 \begin_layout Labeling
14870 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14875 This is the Medium font series.
14876 It's also the default series.
14879 \begin_layout Labeling
14880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14887 This is the Bold font series.
14900 \begin_layout Labeling
14901 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14906 As the name implies.
14911 \begin_layout Labeling
14912 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14917 This is the Upright font shape.
14918 It's also the default shape.
14921 \begin_layout Labeling
14922 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14932 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
14937 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
14942 s the Italic font shape
14948 \begin_layout Labeling
14949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14956 This is the Slanted font shape
14958 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14959 , this is different from italic).
14962 \begin_layout Labeling
14963 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14967 \begin_inset space ~
14974 This is the Small caps font shape
14981 \begin_layout Labeling
14982 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14987 Alters the text color.
14988 Note that not all DVI
14989 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
14991 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
14994 viewers are able to display colors.
14996 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15000 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15002 \begin_inset space ~
15009 , which means that the document default color set in
15011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15012 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15018 \begin_inset space ~
15024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15026 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15030 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15110 \begin_inset Index idx
15113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15122 \begin_layout Labeling
15123 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15128 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15129 the language of the document.
15130 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15131 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15132 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15135 in blue to indicate the change
15136 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15137 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15141 \begin_inset Newline newline
15144 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15146 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15147 When using the spell checking (see section
15148 \begin_inset space ~
15152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15154 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15158 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15159 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15161 \begin_inset Newline newline
15164 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15166 Exclude from Spellchecking
15169 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15172 \begin_layout Labeling
15173 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15178 Alters the size of the font.
15180 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15182 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15189 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15190 document font size.
15191 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15192 the details, but a general description of what
15198 \begin_layout Labeling
15199 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15220 arg "font-size tiny"
15226 \begin_layout Labeling
15227 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15248 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15254 \begin_layout Labeling
15255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15276 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15282 \begin_layout Labeling
15283 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15304 arg "font-size small"
15310 \begin_layout Labeling
15311 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15325 It's also the default size.
15329 arg "font-size normal"
15335 \begin_layout Labeling
15336 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15357 arg "font-size large"
15363 \begin_layout Labeling
15364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15385 arg "font-size larger"
15391 \begin_layout Labeling
15392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15413 arg "font-size largest"
15419 \begin_layout Labeling
15420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15441 arg "font-size huge"
15447 \begin_layout Labeling
15448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15469 arg "font-size giant"
15475 \begin_layout Labeling
15476 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15481 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15501 arg "font-size increase"
15507 \begin_layout Labeling
15508 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15513 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15533 arg "font-size decrease"
15540 \begin_layout Standard
15545 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15546 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15548 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15549 — use those instead.
15550 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15553 \begin_layout Labeling
15554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15556 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15566 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15567 change a few other things at the character level
15568 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15569 have text passages being underlined
15573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15574 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15575 days, when you could not change fonts.
15576 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15577 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15578 because some people
15582 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15589 \begin_layout Labeling
15590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15592 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15599 This is text with emphasize on
15602 This might seem like the same as
15606 , but it is actually a bit different.
15612 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15614 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15615 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15619 \begin_layout Labeling
15620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15622 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15627 Don't use underlining.
15632 \begin_layout Labeling
15633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15635 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15639 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15647 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15649 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15658 arg "font-underline"
15664 \begin_inset Newline newline
15668 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15671 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15672 when you could not change fonts.
15673 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15674 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15675 because some people
15679 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15684 \begin_layout Labeling
15685 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15689 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15691 \begin_inset space ~
15700 This is text with Double under
15701 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15703 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15712 arg "font-underunderline"
15716 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15718 \begin_inset Newline newline
15721 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15722 about double underbar
15727 \begin_layout Labeling
15728 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15732 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15734 \begin_inset space ~
15743 This is text with Wavy under
15744 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15746 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15755 arg "font-underwave"
15759 \begin_inset Newline newline
15762 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15763 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15764 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15769 \begin_layout Labeling
15770 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15772 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15777 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15783 \begin_layout Labeling
15784 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15786 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15791 Don't use strikethrough.
15794 \begin_layout Labeling
15795 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15799 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15801 \begin_inset space ~
15805 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15813 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15815 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15816 Single strikethrough
15824 arg "font-strikeout"
15828 \begin_inset Newline newline
15831 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15832 changed in the meantime.
15835 \begin_layout Labeling
15836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15838 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15842 \begin_inset space ~
15846 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15848 \begin_inset space ~
15852 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15860 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15862 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15868 \begin_inset Newline newline
15871 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15875 \begin_layout Standard
15877 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
15878 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15879 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
15880 \begin_inset space ~
15884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15886 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15893 \begin_layout Itemize
15895 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15902 This is text with emphasize on
15907 \begin_layout Itemize
15911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
15918 This is text with Noun on.
15920 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
15927 , this is a logical attribute.
15928 Normally it's equivalent to
15931 \begin_inset space ~
15941 \begin_layout Standard
15942 So you have a huge number of combinations to
15943 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
15945 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
15950 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
15951 chosen a new character style
15952 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
15953 applied a text property
15956 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
15959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15961 \begin_inset space ~
15964 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15966 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
15972 arg "dialog-show character"
15980 arg "dialog-show character"
15983 ) dialog, the settings are
15984 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
15988 You can activate the
15989 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
15991 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
15992 last applied properties
15994 by using the toolbar button
15997 arg "textstyle-apply"
16001 The button lets you apply
16002 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16003 your custom character style
16004 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16007 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16009 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16010 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16011 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16012 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16017 \begin_layout Standard
16018 To completely reset the
16019 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16022 text properties of a selection
16024 to the default, use
16032 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16033 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16034 you just set the shape to
16035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16053 \begin_inset space ~
16067 \begin_layout Standard
16069 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16070 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16078 \begin_inset space ~
16090 \begin_layout Itemize
16092 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16105 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16123 \begin_inset Newline newline
16127 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16141 \begin_inset Note Note
16144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16145 For more on phantoms see section
16146 \begin_inset space ~
16150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16152 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16162 \begin_inset Newline newline
16168 \begin_layout Itemize
16170 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16175 fonts use characters with serifs.
16176 These are the small
16177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16184 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16185 The following example shows the difference:
16186 \begin_inset Newline newline
16190 \begin_inset Newline newline
16195 text without serifs
16198 \begin_inset Newline newline
16201 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16202 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16209 \begin_layout Itemize
16211 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16216 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16217 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16218 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16223 \begin_layout Standard
16225 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16233 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16234 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16237 \begin_inset space ~
16242 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16243 the property to be removed.
16244 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16245 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16246 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16264 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16265 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16273 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16277 \begin_inset space ~
16282 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16293 If you, for example, set
16294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16312 \begin_inset space ~
16317 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16326 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16331 \begin_layout Standard
16333 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16336 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16337 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16340 \begin_layout Section
16341 Printing and Previewing
16344 \begin_layout Subsection
16348 \begin_layout Standard
16349 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16350 using \SpecialChar LyX
16351 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16352 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16353 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16354 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16356 Additional Features
16361 \begin_layout Standard
16363 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16366 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16367 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16368 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16371 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16372 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16373 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16374 to turn your writing into printable output.
16375 This happens in two stages:
16378 \begin_layout Enumerate
16379 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16380 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16382 a file with the extension,
16383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16397 \begin_layout Enumerate
16398 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16399 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16400 to use the commands in the
16404 file to produce printable output.
16407 \begin_layout Subsection
16408 Output file formats
16409 \begin_inset Index idx
16412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16421 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16429 Simple text (ASCII)
16430 \begin_inset Index idx
16433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16434 File formats ! ASCII
16442 \begin_layout Standard
16443 This file type has the extension
16444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16456 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16460 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16467 \begin_layout Standard
16468 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16470 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16471 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16473 \begin_inset space ~
16479 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16480 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16481 bibliography (section
16482 \begin_inset space ~
16486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16488 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16493 If your document includes such material, use
16495 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16496 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16498 \begin_inset space ~
16502 \begin_inset space ~
16506 \begin_inset space ~
16514 \begin_inset space ~
16518 \begin_inset space ~
16524 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16525 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16528 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16531 \begin_inset Index idx
16534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16535 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16544 \begin_layout Standard
16545 This file type has the extension
16546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16557 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16560 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16561 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16562 -Errors or to process it manually
16563 with console commands.
16564 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16565 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16566 's temporary directory whenever you
16567 view or export your document.
16570 \begin_layout Standard
16571 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16572 -file using the menu
16574 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16575 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16579 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16580 export variants are explained in section
16581 \begin_inset space ~
16585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16587 reference "subsec:Export"
16594 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16596 \begin_inset Index idx
16599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16608 \begin_layout Standard
16609 This file type has the extension
16610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16630 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16631 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16632 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16636 \begin_layout Standard
16637 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16638 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16639 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16640 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16641 when you view the DVI.
16642 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16645 \begin_layout Standard
16646 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16648 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16649 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16654 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16655 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16657 \begin_inset space ~
16663 The latter option uses the program
16665 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16671 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16674 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16675 font access (see section
16676 \begin_inset space ~
16680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16682 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16687 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16688 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16695 \begin_inset Index idx
16698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16699 File formats ! PostScript
16707 \begin_layout Standard
16708 This file type has the extension
16709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16721 PostScript was developed by the company
16725 as a printer language.
16726 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16728 PostScript can be seen as a
16729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16732 programming language
16733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16736 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16741 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16748 \begin_inset Index idx
16751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16753 packages ! pstricks
16763 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16766 \begin_layout Standard
16767 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16771 Encapsulated PostScript
16772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16775 (EPS, file extension
16776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16788 As \SpecialChar LyX
16789 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16790 convert them in the background to EPS.
16791 If, for example, you have 50
16792 \begin_inset space ~
16795 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16797 \begin_inset space ~
16800 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16801 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16803 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16804 EPS to avoid this problem.
16807 \begin_layout Standard
16808 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16810 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16811 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16817 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16819 \begin_inset Index idx
16822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16829 \begin_inset Index idx
16832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16841 \begin_layout Standard
16842 This file type has the extension
16843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16859 Portable Document Format
16860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16867 was derived from PostScript.
16868 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16877 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16878 looks exactly the same.
16881 \begin_layout Standard
16882 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16886 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16890 (JPG, file extension
16891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16918 Portable Network Graphics
16919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16922 (PNG, file extension
16923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16935 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
16936 converts them in the
16937 background to one of these formats.
16938 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
16939 will slow down your workflow.
16940 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
16943 \begin_layout Standard
16944 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
16946 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16952 \begin_layout Description
16954 \begin_inset space ~
16957 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16961 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16964 \begin_layout Description
16966 \begin_inset space ~
16973 ) This uses the program
16975 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16978 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16981 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16984 is a new engine, derived from
16988 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16989 access (see section
16990 \begin_inset space ~
16994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16996 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17001 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17002 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17007 \begin_layout Description
17009 \begin_inset space ~
17016 ) This uses the program
17021 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17027 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17028 font access (see section
17029 \begin_inset space ~
17033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17035 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17040 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17041 vertically written Japanese.
17044 \begin_layout Description
17046 \begin_inset space ~
17049 (cropped) This is the same as
17052 \begin_inset space ~
17057 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17058 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17059 to generate good-looking
17060 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17063 \begin_layout Description
17065 \begin_inset space ~
17068 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17072 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17076 \begin_layout Description
17078 \begin_inset space ~
17081 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17085 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17086 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17090 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17091 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17094 \begin_layout Standard
17098 \begin_inset space ~
17107 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17108 works without problems.
17109 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17110 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17114 \begin_inset space ~
17122 \begin_inset space ~
17127 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17135 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17137 \begin_inset Index idx
17140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17141 FileFormats ! XHTML
17147 \begin_inset Index idx
17150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17159 \begin_layout Standard
17160 This file type has the extension
17161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17173 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17174 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17175 When \SpecialChar LyX
17176 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17177 suitable for the purpose.
17178 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17181 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17184 between different formats, which are described in section
17186 Math Output in XHTML
17191 \begin_inset space ~
17199 \begin_layout Standard
17200 XHTML output remains
17201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17208 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17209 features are supported yet.
17213 and the World Wide Web
17217 Additional Features
17219 manual, for more information.
17222 \begin_layout Standard
17223 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17225 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17226 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17232 \begin_layout Subsection
17234 \begin_inset Index idx
17237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17246 \begin_layout Standard
17247 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17248 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17257 or use the toolbar button
17264 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17265 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17266 \begin_inset space ~
17270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17272 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17276 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17278 \begin_inset space ~
17282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17284 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17289 Further output formats can be selected via
17291 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17292 View (Other Formats)
17294 or the toolbar button
17303 \begin_layout Standard
17304 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17305 viewer window using the menu
17307 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17312 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17313 Update (Other Formats)
17318 \begin_layout Standard
17319 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17322 To have a real output, export your document.
17325 \begin_layout Section
17326 A few Words about Typography
17327 \begin_inset Index idx
17330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17339 \begin_layout Subsection
17340 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17341 \begin_inset Index idx
17344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17351 \begin_inset Index idx
17354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17363 \begin_layout Standard
17364 In \SpecialChar LyX
17366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17377 symbol comes in four variants: the
17394 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17400 \begin_layout Standard
17401 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17411 height_special "totalheight"
17416 backgroundcolor "none"
17419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17420 \begin_inset Tabular
17421 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17422 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17423 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17424 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17425 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17426 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17427 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17455 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17456 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17495 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17496 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17518 system key combination
17522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17523 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17535 and the em dash with
17538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17551 is the Mac label for the right
17562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17575 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17576 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17598 system key combination or
17599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17626 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17665 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17671 \begin_layout Standard
17672 Dashes can also be inserted with
17674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17676 \begin_inset space ~
17679 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17687 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17688 and 2014 for the en dash).
17691 \begin_layout Standard
17692 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17693 mode and has a length of its own.
17694 Here are some examples:
17697 \begin_layout Enumerate
17698 line- and page-breaks
17699 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17709 \begin_layout Enumerate
17711 \begin_inset space ~
17715 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17725 \begin_layout Enumerate
17726 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17727 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17737 \begin_layout Enumerate
17738 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17742 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17752 \begin_layout Standard
17754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17756 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17757 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17765 \begin_layout Subsection
17766 Dashes and Line Breaks
17767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17769 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17776 \begin_layout Standard
17777 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17778 case and locale, e.
17779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17785 \begin_layout Itemize
17786 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17787 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17790 \begin_layout Itemize
17791 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17795 \begin_layout Itemize
17796 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17797 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17800 \begin_layout Standard
17801 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17802 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17813 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17816 \begin_layout Enumerate
17817 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17818 \begin_inset space ~
17821 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17823 The Elements of Typographic Style
17826 \begin_inset space ~
17829 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17832 \begin_layout Enumerate
17833 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17840 Prevent Hyphenation
17845 \begin_inset space ~
17861 in \SpecialChar TeX
17867 \begin_layout Itemize
17869 \begin_inset space ~
17873 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17883 height_special "totalheight"
17888 backgroundcolor "none"
17891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17900 \begin_layout Itemize
17904 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17914 height_special "totalheight"
17919 backgroundcolor "none"
17922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17926 \begin_inset space ~
17934 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17935 \begin_inset space ~
17938 – sont très utiles.
17941 \begin_layout Itemize
17948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17957 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17962 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17963 \begin_inset space ~
17966 – in contrast to an overfull line
17967 \begin_inset space ~
17970 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17974 \begin_layout Standard
17975 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17978 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17979 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17980 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17981 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17986 \begin_layout Enumerate
17987 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17988 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
17989 or \SpecialChar TeX
17995 \begin_layout Itemize
17999 \begin_inset space ~
18002 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18003 \begin_inset space ~
18006 – sont très utiles.
18010 \begin_layout Enumerate
18011 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18012 \begin_inset Newline newline
18017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18018 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18019 Optional line break
18025 \begin_layout Itemize
18026 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18027 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18028 should be followed by
18029 a line break opportunity.
18032 \begin_layout Standard
18033 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18034 \begin_inset space ~
18038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18040 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18051 \begin_layout Enumerate
18052 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18053 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18054 or en dashes (see section
18055 \begin_inset space ~
18059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18061 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18072 Changes and backwards compatibility
18075 \begin_layout Standard
18076 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18078 \begin_inset space ~
18081 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18082 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18091 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18092 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18100 \begin_layout Standard
18101 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18103 \begin_inset space ~
18106 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18108 prevents ligation to dashes.
18110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18117 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18122 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18123 after the input (unless the current text font is
18131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18132 The behavior was changed since
18133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18148 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18149 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18150 as non-breakable dashes.
18151 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18160 \begin_layout Standard
18163 \begin_inset space ~
18171 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18173 \begin_inset space ~
18176 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18179 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18180 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18181 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18182 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18184 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18188 If you used both literal and
18189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18196 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18198 \begin_inset space ~
18201 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18202 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18205 \begin_layout Subsection
18207 \begin_inset Index idx
18210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18219 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18226 \begin_layout Standard
18227 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18228 but automatically in the output.
18229 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18235 \begin_inset Index idx
18238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18245 following the rules of the document language.
18247 does not hyphenate text in the
18251 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18254 \begin_layout Standard
18256 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18260 font and with unusual constructs, like
18261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18269 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18270 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18271 This is done with the menu
18273 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18274 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18276 \begin_inset space ~
18282 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18284 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18288 \begin_layout Standard
18289 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18290 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18301 would then see the hyphen
18302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18309 as a line break possibility.
18310 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18311 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18314 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18315 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18318 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18320 Prevent Hyphenation
18325 \begin_inset space ~
18333 \begin_layout Subsection
18335 \begin_inset Index idx
18338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18347 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18348 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18351 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18358 \begin_layout Standard
18359 When \SpecialChar LyX
18360 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18361 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18363 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18369 appropriate amount of space.
18370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18373 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18375 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18376 gets after another word.
18379 \begin_layout Standard
18380 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18381 not work in all cases.
18383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18394 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18395 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18398 \begin_layout Standard
18399 Here are some examples of
18403 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18406 \begin_layout Itemize
18411 \begin_layout Itemize
18416 \begin_layout Standard
18417 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18420 \begin_layout Itemize
18422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18426 this is too much space!
18429 \begin_layout Itemize
18434 \begin_layout Standard
18435 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18438 \begin_layout Standard
18439 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18442 \begin_layout Enumerate
18446 \begin_inset space ~
18451 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18452 \begin_inset space ~
18456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18458 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18463 \begin_inset Index idx
18466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18467 Spaces ! inter-word
18475 \begin_layout Enumerate
18479 \begin_inset space ~
18484 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18485 \begin_inset space ~
18489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18491 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18496 \begin_inset Index idx
18499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18508 \begin_layout Enumerate
18512 \begin_inset space ~
18516 \begin_inset space ~
18520 \begin_inset space ~
18527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18529 \begin_inset space ~
18534 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18535 This function is also bound to
18538 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18544 \begin_layout Standard
18545 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18548 \begin_layout Itemize
18550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18554 \begin_inset space \space{}
18557 this is too much space!
18560 \begin_layout Itemize
18561 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18565 \begin_layout Standard
18566 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18567 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18569 will take care of this.
18572 \begin_layout Standard
18573 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18577 \begin_inset space ~
18583 feature described in the section
18585 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18590 Additional Features
18595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18597 \begin_inset Index idx
18600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18601 Typography ! Quotation marks
18607 \begin_inset Index idx
18610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18611 Quotation marks | see
18615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18641 \begin_layout Standard
18643 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18644 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18645 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18655 The keyboard character,
18659 , generates this automatically.
18662 \begin_layout Standard
18663 You can specify what character the
18667 key produces by using the submenu
18673 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18677 \begin_inset Index idx
18680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18681 Document ! Settings
18686 dialog and switching the
18690 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18691 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18693 \begin_inset space ~
18699 \begin_layout Labeling
18700 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18712 \begin_inset space ~
18716 \begin_inset space ~
18720 \begin_inset Quotes els
18724 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18738 \begin_inset Quotes els
18742 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18745 quotation marks (as common, e.
18746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18752 \begin_layout Labeling
18753 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18756 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18760 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18764 \begin_inset space ~
18768 \begin_inset space ~
18772 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18776 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18782 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18786 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18790 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18794 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18797 quotation marks (as common, e.
18798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18804 \begin_layout Labeling
18805 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18808 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18812 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18816 \begin_inset space ~
18820 \begin_inset space ~
18824 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18828 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18834 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18838 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18842 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18846 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18849 quotation marks (as common, e.
18850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18856 \begin_layout Labeling
18857 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18860 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18864 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18868 \begin_inset space ~
18872 \begin_inset space ~
18876 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18880 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18886 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18890 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18894 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18898 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18901 quotation marks (as common, e.
18902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18908 \begin_layout Labeling
18909 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18912 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18916 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18920 \begin_inset space ~
18924 \begin_inset space ~
18928 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18932 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18938 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18942 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18946 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18950 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18953 quotation marks (as common, e.
18954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18957 g., in Switzerland)
18960 \begin_layout Labeling
18961 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18964 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18968 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18972 \begin_inset space ~
18976 \begin_inset space ~
18980 \begin_inset Quotes als
18984 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18990 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18994 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18998 \begin_inset Quotes als
19002 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19005 quotation marks (as common, e.
19006 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19012 \begin_layout Labeling
19013 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19016 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19020 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19024 \begin_inset space ~
19028 \begin_inset space ~
19032 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19036 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19042 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19046 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19050 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19054 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19057 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19060 \begin_layout Labeling
19061 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19064 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19068 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19072 \begin_inset space ~
19076 \begin_inset space ~
19080 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19084 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19090 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19094 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19098 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19102 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19105 quotation marks (as common, e.
19106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19109 g., in Great Britain)
19112 \begin_layout Labeling
19113 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19116 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19120 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19124 \begin_inset space ~
19128 \begin_inset space ~
19132 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19136 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19142 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19146 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19150 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19154 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19157 quotation marks (as common, e.
19158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19164 \begin_layout Labeling
19165 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19168 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19172 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19176 \begin_inset space ~
19180 \begin_inset space ~
19184 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19188 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19194 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19198 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19202 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19206 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19209 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19214 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19215 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19216 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19217 the inner marks differ).
19225 \begin_layout Labeling
19226 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19229 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19233 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19241 \begin_inset space ~
19245 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19249 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19255 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19259 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19263 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19267 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19270 quotation marks (as common, e.
19271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19277 \begin_layout Labeling
19278 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19281 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19285 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19289 \begin_inset space ~
19293 \begin_inset space ~
19297 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19301 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19307 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19311 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19315 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19319 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19322 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19325 \begin_layout Labeling
19326 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19327 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19335 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19341 \begin_inset space ~
19345 \begin_inset space ~
19351 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19359 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19363 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19367 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19371 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19375 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19378 quotation marks (as common, e.
19379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19387 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19388 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19396 \begin_layout Labeling
19397 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19398 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19406 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19412 \begin_inset space ~
19416 \begin_inset space ~
19422 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19430 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19434 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19438 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19442 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19446 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19449 quotation marks (as common, e.
19450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19453 g., in North Korea and China)
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19458 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19459 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19467 \begin_layout Standard
19468 Inner quotation marks
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19473 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19474 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19475 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19483 does not necessarily mean
19484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19492 This is why we call them
19493 \begin_inset Quotes els
19497 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19513 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19515 \begin_inset Quotes els
19519 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19522 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19525 arg "quote-insert inner"
19530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19536 \begin_layout Standard
19537 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19538 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19539 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19540 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19541 If you check the setting
19543 Use dynamic quotation marks
19547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19548 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19551 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19552 they appear in a special color).
19553 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19554 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19559 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19562 \begin_layout Standard
19563 Individual quotation marks (i.
19564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19567 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19568 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19572 \begin_layout Subsection
19574 \begin_inset Index idx
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19578 Typography ! Ligatures
19584 \begin_inset Index idx
19587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19618 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19625 \begin_layout Standard
19626 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19627 print them as single characters.
19628 These groups are known as
19633 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19634 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19636 Here are the standard ligatures:
19639 \begin_layout Itemize
19643 \begin_layout Itemize
19647 \begin_layout Itemize
19651 \begin_layout Itemize
19655 \begin_layout Itemize
19659 \begin_layout Standard
19660 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19663 \begin_layout Standard
19664 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19665 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19673 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19689 To break a ligature, use
19691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19692 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19694 \begin_inset space ~
19701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19712 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19729 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19737 \begin_layout Subsection
19739 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19741 \begin_inset Index idx
19744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19754 \begin_layout Standard
19757 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19758 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19762 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19765 \begin_layout Description
19767 The name of the game.
19770 \begin_layout Description
19772 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19776 \begin_layout Description
19778 The \SpecialChar TeX
19779 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19783 \begin_layout Description
19784 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19785 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19789 \begin_layout Standard
19790 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19796 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19804 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19805 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19806 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19807 converges to the number
19808 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19811 : The actual version is
19812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19820 , the previous one was
19821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19832 \begin_layout Subsection
19834 \begin_inset Index idx
19837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 \begin_layout Standard
19847 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19848 space between two words.
19849 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19859 for units use the menu
19861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19862 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19864 \begin_inset space ~
19872 arg "space-insert thin"
19878 \begin_layout Standard
19879 Here is an example to show the differences:
19882 \begin_layout Standard
19883 \begin_inset Tabular
19884 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19885 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19886 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19887 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 \begin_inset space ~
19898 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 space between number and unit
19917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19926 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19938 half space between number and unit
19951 \begin_layout Subsection
19953 \begin_inset Index idx
19956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19957 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19965 \begin_layout Standard
19966 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19968 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19969 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19970 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19971 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19972 These bits of text became known as
19983 \begin_layout Standard
19984 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19985 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19986 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19987 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19988 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19989 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19990 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19991 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19992 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19993 \begin_inset Newline newline
20001 \begin_inset Newline newline
20009 \begin_inset Newline newline
20012 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20013 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20014 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20016 \begin_inset space ~
20020 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20022 key "latexcompanion"
20028 \begin_inset space ~
20032 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20039 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20040 's page break mechanism.
20043 \begin_layout Chapter
20044 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20047 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20054 \begin_layout Standard
20055 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20058 \begin_inset space ~
20064 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20067 \begin_layout Section
20069 \begin_inset Index idx
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20088 \begin_layout Standard
20090 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20093 \begin_layout Description
20096 \begin_inset space ~
20099 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20100 \begin_inset Newline newline
20104 \begin_inset Note Note
20107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20108 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20116 \begin_layout Description
20117 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20118 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20119 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20122 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20123 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20125 \begin_inset space ~
20131 \begin_inset Newline newline
20135 \begin_inset Note Comment
20138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20139 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20148 \begin_layout Description
20150 \begin_inset space ~
20153 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20154 set in the document settings under
20156 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20158 \begin_inset space ~
20164 \begin_inset Newline newline
20168 \begin_inset Newline newline
20172 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20181 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20182 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20187 of a comment that appears in the output.
20193 \begin_inset Newline newline
20197 \begin_inset Newline newline
20200 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20203 \begin_layout Standard
20204 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20216 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20219 \begin_layout Section
20221 \begin_inset Index idx
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20233 name "sec:Footnotes"
20240 \begin_layout Standard
20242 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20248 or the toolbar button
20251 arg "footnote-insert"
20263 \begin_inset Graphics
20264 filename clipart/footnote.png
20273 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20274 's representation of your footnote.
20284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20303 label, the box will
20307 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20308 Clicking on the box label again will close
20321 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20322 and click on the footnote
20337 \begin_layout Standard
20338 Here is an example footnote:
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20347 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20355 \begin_layout Standard
20356 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20357 position where the footnote box is placed.
20358 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20359 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20360 according to the document class.
20362 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20363 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20369 ey are described in the
20372 \begin_inset space ~
20380 \begin_layout Section
20382 \begin_inset Index idx
20385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20394 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20401 \begin_layout Standard
20402 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20404 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20406 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20408 \begin_inset space ~
20413 or the toolbar button
20416 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20442 appearing within your text.
20443 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20444 's representation of your margin
20453 \begin_layout Standard
20454 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20458 \begin_inset Marginal
20461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20463 This is a marginal note.
20471 \begin_layout Standard
20472 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20473 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20474 pages, right on odd pages.
20477 \begin_layout Standard
20478 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20481 \begin_inset space ~
20489 \begin_inset space ~
20497 \begin_layout Section
20498 Graphics and Images
20499 \begin_inset Index idx
20502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 \begin_inset Index idx
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20521 name "sec:Graphics"
20528 \begin_layout Standard
20529 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20530 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20533 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20542 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20545 \begin_layout Standard
20546 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20551 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20552 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20554 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20555 \begin_inset space ~
20559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20561 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20568 \begin_layout Standard
20573 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20574 of the image in the output.
20575 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20579 \begin_inset space ~
20583 \begin_inset space ~
20592 \begin_inset space ~
20596 \begin_inset space ~
20600 \begin_inset space ~
20605 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20606 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20614 \begin_layout Standard
20618 \begin_inset space ~
20622 \begin_inset space ~
20627 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20628 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20630 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20635 \begin_inset space ~
20640 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20641 with the image size is printed.
20644 \begin_layout Standard
20645 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20646 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20648 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20651 \begin_layout Standard
20653 \begin_inset Graphics
20654 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20662 \begin_layout Standard
20663 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20664 the image into a float, see section
20665 \begin_inset space ~
20669 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20671 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20678 \begin_layout Subsection
20680 \begin_inset Index idx
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20692 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20699 \begin_layout Standard
20700 You can insert images in any known file format.
20701 But as we explained in section
20702 \begin_inset space ~
20706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20708 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20712 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20714 therefore uses the program
20718 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20719 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20720 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20721 \begin_inset space ~
20725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20727 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20734 \begin_layout Standard
20735 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20738 \begin_layout Description
20740 \begin_inset space ~
20743 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20744 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20745 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20749 Graphics Interchange Format
20750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20753 (GIF, file extension
20754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20766 \begin_inset Index idx
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20801 Portable Network Graphics
20802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20805 (PNG, file extension
20806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20818 \begin_inset Index idx
20821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20853 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20857 (JPG, file extension
20858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20882 \begin_inset Index idx
20885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20916 \begin_layout Description
20918 \begin_inset space ~
20921 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20923 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20924 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20925 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20926 \begin_inset Newline newline
20929 Scalable image formats can be
20930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20933 Scalable Vector Graphics
20934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20937 (SVG, file extension
20938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20950 \begin_inset Index idx
20953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20985 Encapsulated PostScript
20986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20989 (EPS, file extension
20990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21002 \begin_inset Index idx
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21037 Portable Document Format
21038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21041 (PDF, file extension
21042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21054 \begin_inset Index idx
21057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21072 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21073 result will not be scalable.
21074 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21088 \begin_layout Standard
21089 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21096 \begin_layout Subsection
21097 Grouping of Image Settings
21098 \begin_inset Index idx
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21102 Images ! Settings grouping
21110 \begin_layout Standard
21111 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21113 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21114 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21116 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21117 need to manually change each of them.
21121 \begin_layout Standard
21122 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21125 \begin_inset space ~
21129 \begin_inset space ~
21141 \begin_inset space ~
21145 \begin_inset space ~
21151 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21152 and checking the name of the desired group.
21155 \begin_layout Section
21157 \begin_inset Index idx
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21176 \begin_layout Standard
21177 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21180 arg "tabular-insert"
21185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21189 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
21190 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21191 from the rest of the table.
21192 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21193 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21195 Here is an example table:
21198 \begin_layout Standard
21200 \begin_inset Tabular
21201 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21202 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 \begin_layout Subsection
21410 \begin_layout Standard
21411 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21414 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21418 This brings up the table dialog.
21419 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21420 cursor is placed currently.
21421 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21422 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21423 done on all of your selection.
21426 \begin_layout Standard
21427 In addition to the table dialog, the
21430 \begin_inset space ~
21435 helps you in setting table properties.
21436 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21439 \begin_layout Standard
21443 \begin_inset space ~
21448 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21449 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21450 current cell respectively.
21451 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21453 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21454 of text, see section
21455 \begin_inset space ~
21459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21461 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21468 \begin_layout Standard
21469 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21470 using the check box
21479 This will merge the cells to
21483 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21484 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21485 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21486 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21487 in the last row without the upper border:
21490 \begin_layout Standard
21492 \begin_inset Tabular
21493 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21494 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21495 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21496 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21497 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21498 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21509 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21594 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21629 \begin_layout Standard
21630 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21631 -arguments for the table.
21632 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21633 explained in the chapter
21640 \begin_inset space ~
21646 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21647 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21648 but are visible in the output.
21651 \begin_layout Standard
21652 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21660 Most DVI-viewers are
21664 able to display rotations.
21672 \begin_layout Standard
21677 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21682 adds lines for all cell borders.
21685 \begin_layout Subsection
21687 \begin_inset Index idx
21690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 Tables ! Multi-page
21697 \begin_inset Index idx
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21709 \begin_layout Standard
21710 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21713 \begin_inset space ~
21717 \begin_inset space ~
21725 \begin_inset space ~
21730 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21731 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21734 \begin_layout Description
21739 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21740 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21741 Except for the first page, if
21744 \begin_inset space ~
21752 \begin_layout Description
21756 \begin_inset space ~
21761 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21762 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21765 \begin_layout Description
21770 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21771 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21772 except for the last page, if
21775 \begin_inset space ~
21783 \begin_layout Description
21787 \begin_inset space ~
21792 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21793 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21796 \begin_layout Description
21797 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21798 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21800 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21804 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21807 \begin_inset space ~
21815 \begin_layout Standard
21816 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21817 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21818 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21824 In this context, first means first in this order:
21827 \begin_inset space ~
21839 \begin_inset space ~
21844 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21847 \begin_layout Standard
21849 \begin_inset Tabular
21850 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21851 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21852 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21853 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21854 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21855 <row endfirsthead="true">
21856 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21862 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
21867 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21876 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 <row endfirsthead="true">
21887 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <row endhead="true">
21920 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21940 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <row endhead="true">
21951 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21962 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21971 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 <row endfoot="true">
21984 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21995 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22976 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22985 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22994 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23005 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23036 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23067 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23098 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23129 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23160 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23191 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23222 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23253 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23284 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23315 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23346 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23377 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23408 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23439 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23470 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23501 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23532 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23563 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23594 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23625 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23656 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23687 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23718 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23749 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23780 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23811 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23842 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23873 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23904 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23935 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23965 <row endlastfoot="true">
23966 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23986 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24003 \begin_layout Subsection
24005 \begin_inset Index idx
24008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24017 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24024 \begin_layout Standard
24025 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24026 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24027 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24028 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24032 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24035 \begin_layout Standard
24036 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24037 for the column in the table dialog.
24038 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24039 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24043 \begin_layout Standard
24045 \begin_inset Tabular
24046 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24047 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24048 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24049 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24050 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24070 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24139 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24195 This is longer now.
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24251 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24252 This is longer now.
24257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24283 \begin_layout Standard
24284 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24285 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24290 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24291 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24297 Selection with the mouse or with
24301 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24302 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24303 the selection from outside the table.
24306 \begin_layout Section
24308 \begin_inset Index idx
24311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24327 \begin_layout Subsection
24331 \begin_layout Standard
24332 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24333 have a fixed location.
24335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24342 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24350 \begin_inset space ~
24355 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24356 too many notes on the current page.
24359 \begin_layout Standard
24360 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24361 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24362 and pages without text.
24363 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24364 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24365 Floats are therefore numbered.
24366 Referencing is described in section
24367 \begin_inset space ~
24371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24373 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24380 \begin_layout Standard
24381 To insert a float, use the menu
24383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24387 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24388 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24390 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24391 \begin_inset Index idx
24394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24400 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24401 paragraph within the float.
24402 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24403 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24404 left-clicking on the box label.
24405 A closed float box looks like this:
24406 \begin_inset Graphics
24407 filename clipart/float.png
24412 – a gray button with a red label.
24415 \begin_layout Standard
24416 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24418 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24421 \begin_layout Subsection
24423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24425 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24430 \begin_inset Index idx
24433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24434 Floats ! Figure floats
24442 \begin_layout Standard
24444 \begin_inset space ~
24448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24450 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24454 was created using the menu
24456 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24457 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24463 arg "float-insert figure"
24467 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24470 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24476 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24480 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24481 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24483 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24485 \begin_inset space ~
24493 arg "layout-paragraph"
24499 \begin_layout Standard
24500 \begin_inset Float figure
24507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24509 \begin_inset Graphics
24510 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24520 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24525 name "fig:A-star-in"
24542 \begin_layout Standard
24543 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24544 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24555 ) and refer to it using the menu
24557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24563 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24567 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24568 vague references like
24569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24576 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24577 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24587 For more about cross-references, see section
24588 \begin_inset space ~
24592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24594 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24601 \begin_layout Standard
24602 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24603 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24604 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24605 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24606 as described in section
24607 \begin_inset space ~
24611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24613 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24619 \begin_inset space ~
24623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24625 reference "fig:Two-images"
24629 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24630 You can also set the images one below the other.
24632 \begin_inset space ~
24636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24638 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24645 reference "fig:Star"
24649 are the subfigures.
24652 \begin_layout Standard
24653 \begin_inset Float figure
24660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24661 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24665 \begin_inset Float figure
24672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24673 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24678 name "fig:Undefinable"
24690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24691 \begin_inset Graphics
24692 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24704 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24708 \begin_inset Float figure
24715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24716 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24719 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24734 \begin_inset Graphics
24735 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24747 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24754 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24759 name "fig:Two-images"
24776 \begin_layout Subsection
24778 \begin_inset Index idx
24781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24782 Floats ! Table floats
24790 \begin_layout Standard
24791 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24793 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24794 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24797 or the toolbar button
24800 arg "float-insert table"
24804 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24805 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24806 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24808 \begin_inset space ~
24812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24814 reference "tab:Table-float"
24821 \begin_layout Standard
24822 \begin_inset Float table
24829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24830 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24835 name "tab:Table-float"
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24849 \begin_inset Tabular
24850 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24851 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24852 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24853 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24854 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24981 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25002 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25005 \end{array}\right]$
25013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25047 \begin_layout Subsection
25049 \begin_inset Index idx
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25061 \begin_layout Standard
25063 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25064 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25065 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25067 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25075 \begin_inset space ~
25083 \begin_layout Section
25085 \begin_inset Index idx
25088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25097 \begin_layout Standard
25099 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25101 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25102 \begin_inset space \space{}
25109 \begin_layout Standard
25110 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25111 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25117 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25118 and its alignment within the page.
25121 \begin_layout Standard
25123 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25133 height_special "totalheight"
25138 backgroundcolor "none"
25141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25144 This is a minipage.
25145 The text is set in an italic style.
25148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25151 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25152 another formatting.
25160 \begin_layout Standard
25161 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25164 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25168 as described in section
25169 \begin_inset space ~
25173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25175 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25180 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25186 \begin_layout Standard
25187 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25197 height_special "totalheight"
25202 backgroundcolor "none"
25205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25206 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25207 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25213 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25217 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25227 height_special "totalheight"
25232 backgroundcolor "none"
25235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25236 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25237 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25245 \begin_layout Standard
25246 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25252 \begin_layout Standard
25253 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25255 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25262 \begin_inset space ~
25270 \begin_layout Chapter
25271 Mathematical Formulas
25272 \begin_inset Index idx
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25282 \begin_inset Index idx
25285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25316 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25323 \begin_layout Standard
25324 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25329 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25332 \begin_layout Section
25334 \begin_inset Index idx
25337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 \begin_layout Standard
25347 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25360 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25362 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25363 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25364 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25372 \begin_layout Standard
25373 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25377 \begin_inset space ~
25382 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25385 \begin_layout Standard
25386 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25387 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25390 \begin_layout Standard
25391 This is a line with an inline formula
25392 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25398 \begin_layout Standard
25399 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25400 paragraph, like this one:
25401 \begin_inset Formula
25408 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25411 \begin_layout Standard
25413 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25415 For example, typing
25416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25429 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25430 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25434 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25437 \begin_inset space ~
25445 \begin_layout Subsection
25446 Navigating in Formulas
25447 \begin_inset Index idx
25450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25459 \begin_layout Standard
25460 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25461 achieved with the arrow keys.
25463 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25464 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25469 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25470 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25474 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25478 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25481 \end{array}\right]$
25489 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25494 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25495 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25498 \begin_layout Standard
25503 , printed in this document as
25504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25508 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25515 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25516 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25517 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25522 For example, if you want
25523 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25531 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25541 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25545 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25550 , since in the latter case only the
25553 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25558 will be under the square root sign:
25559 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25565 \begin_layout Standard
25566 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25568 \begin_inset Formula
25570 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25579 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25580 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25583 \begin_layout Subsection
25587 \begin_layout Standard
25588 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25589 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25593 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25594 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25595 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25596 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25597 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25601 \begin_layout Subsection
25602 Exponents and Subscripts
25603 \begin_inset Index idx
25606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25613 \begin_inset Index idx
25616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25625 \begin_layout Standard
25626 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25629 arg "math-superscript"
25635 arg "math-subscript"
25638 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25640 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25643 , type in a formula
25646 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25656 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25662 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25666 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25672 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25678 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25687 , you have to use an extra
25691 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25692 For example, if you want
25693 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25699 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25705 Subscripts are similar: To get
25706 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25712 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25720 \begin_layout Subsection
25722 \begin_inset Index idx
25725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25734 \begin_layout Standard
25735 Create a fraction either with the command
25741 or by using the icon
25744 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25750 \begin_inset space ~
25756 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25757 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25758 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25763 To move back up, press
25768 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25769 \begin_inset Formula
25771 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25774 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25782 \begin_layout Subsection
25784 \begin_inset Index idx
25787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25796 \begin_layout Standard
25797 Roots can be created using the
25800 \begin_inset space ~
25808 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25814 arg "math-insert \\root"
25836 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
25842 always produces a square root.
25845 \begin_layout Subsection
25846 Operators with Limits
25847 \begin_inset Index idx
25850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25857 \begin_inset Index idx
25860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25869 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25876 \begin_layout Standard
25878 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25882 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25885 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25886 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25887 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25888 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25889 The sum operator will automatically place its
25890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25897 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25899 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25903 \begin_inset Formula
25905 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25910 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25914 \begin_layout Standard
25915 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25917 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25918 behind the operator and using the menu
25920 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25921 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25923 \begin_inset space ~
25927 \begin_inset space ~
25941 \begin_layout Standard
25942 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25951 \begin_inset Index idx
25954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25961 \begin_inset Formula
25963 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25968 which will place the
25969 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25981 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25982 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25988 \begin_layout Standard
25989 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25996 Have a look at section
25997 \begin_inset space ~
26001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26003 reference "subsec:Functions"
26007 for an explanation of function macros.
26010 \begin_layout Subsection
26012 \begin_inset Index idx
26015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26024 \begin_layout Standard
26025 Most math symbols can be found in the
26028 \begin_inset space ~
26033 under one of several categories; including
26050 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26054 \begin_layout Standard
26055 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26056 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26057 don't have to use the
26060 \begin_inset space ~
26065 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26067 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26070 \begin_layout Subsection
26072 \begin_inset Index idx
26075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26084 \begin_layout Standard
26085 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26091 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26097 \begin_inset space ~
26105 arg "math-insert \\space"
26109 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26110 For example, the sequence
26115 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26118 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26120 \begin_inset Graphics
26121 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26126 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26127 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26128 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26129 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26130 , because they are negative
26132 Here are two examples:
26135 \begin_layout Standard
26145 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26151 \begin_layout Standard
26161 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26167 \begin_layout Subsection
26169 \begin_inset Index idx
26172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26181 name "subsec:Functions"
26188 \begin_layout Standard
26192 \begin_inset space ~
26197 contains under the button
26200 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26203 a number of function macros, such as
26204 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26208 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26216 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26223 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26224 avoid confusions, because
26225 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26229 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26235 \begin_layout Standard
26236 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26238 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26242 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26248 \begin_layout Standard
26249 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26250 are placed, as described in section
26251 \begin_inset space ~
26255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26257 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26264 \begin_layout Subsection
26266 \begin_inset Index idx
26269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26278 \begin_layout Standard
26279 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26281 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26282 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26283 commands, for example, to enter
26284 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26287 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26288 Our example is entered by typing
26293 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26300 \begin_inset space ~
26304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26306 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26310 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26313 \begin_layout Standard
26314 \begin_inset Float table
26321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26322 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26327 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26331 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26341 \begin_inset Tabular
26342 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26343 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26344 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26345 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26346 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26430 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26484 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26538 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26592 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26646 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26700 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26754 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26808 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26862 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26907 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26928 \begin_layout Standard
26929 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26932 \begin_inset space ~
26940 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26943 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26947 \begin_layout Section
26948 Brackets and Delimiters
26949 \begin_inset Index idx
26952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26959 \begin_inset Index idx
26962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26971 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26978 \begin_layout Standard
26979 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26981 For some purposes, using just the keys
26986 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26987 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26988 toolbar delimiter icon
26991 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26995 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26996 \begin_inset Formula
26998 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27006 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27007 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27011 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27014 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27020 \begin_inset Formula
27022 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27030 \begin_layout Standard
27031 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27032 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27036 \begin_layout Standard
27037 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27038 left side and right side.
27039 If you use the option
27042 \begin_inset space ~
27047 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27048 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27050 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27055 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27056 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27059 \begin_layout Standard
27060 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27061 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27062 is to go inside the brackets.
27063 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27068 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27069 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27070 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27074 arg "math-delim ( )"
27080 \begin_layout Section
27081 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27082 \begin_inset Index idx
27085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27092 \begin_inset Index idx
27095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27102 \begin_inset Index idx
27105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27106 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27114 \begin_layout Standard
27115 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27119 \begin_inset space ~
27127 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27131 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27132 Here is an example:
27133 \begin_inset Formula
27135 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27144 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27145 \begin_inset space ~
27149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27151 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27156 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27157 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27158 This alignment is set in the box
27163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27212 for every column as default.
27213 For example, the sequence
27214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27225 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27226 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27227 corresponds to the relevant column.
27228 The result will look like this:
27229 \begin_inset Formula
27232 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27233 column & has & has\,right\\
27234 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27243 \begin_layout Standard
27244 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27247 arg "newline-insert newline"
27250 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27251 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27253 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27256 or the math toolbar.
27259 \begin_layout Standard
27260 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27261 It can be created with the menu
27263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27264 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27266 \begin_inset space ~
27278 Here is an example:
27279 \begin_inset Formula
27293 \begin_layout Standard
27294 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27297 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27300 arg "newline-insert newline"
27304 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27309 arg "newline-insert newline"
27312 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27320 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27321 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27322 A new row is created by every further entry of
27325 arg "newline-insert newline"
27329 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27330 Here is an example:
27331 \begin_inset Formula
27333 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27334 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27339 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27340 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27341 \begin_inset Formula
27343 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27351 \begin_layout Standard
27352 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27359 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27360 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27363 reference "eq:asquared"
27368 The other types are described in section
27369 \begin_inset space ~
27373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27375 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27382 \begin_layout Section
27383 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27384 \begin_inset Index idx
27387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27388 Math ! Formula numbering
27394 \begin_inset Index idx
27397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27398 Math ! Referencing formulas
27404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27406 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27413 \begin_layout Standard
27414 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27416 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27417 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27419 \begin_inset space ~
27423 \begin_inset space ~
27431 arg "math-number-toggle"
27435 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27436 within parentheses.
27437 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27438 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27439 the document class.
27440 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27441 separated by a dot:
27442 \begin_inset Formula
27452 arg "math-number-toggle"
27455 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27456 You can only number displayed formulas.
27459 \begin_layout Standard
27460 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27462 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27463 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27465 \begin_inset space ~
27469 \begin_inset space ~
27477 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27480 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27481 \begin_inset Formula
27484 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27490 To number all lines use the shortcut
27493 arg "math-number-toggle"
27499 \begin_layout Standard
27500 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27503 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27504 A label is inserted with the menu
27506 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27515 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27516 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27517 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27529 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27530 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27531 We inserted in the following example the label
27532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27539 in the second line:
27540 \begin_inset Formula
27542 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27543 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27548 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27549 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27550 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27552 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27554 \begin_inset space ~
27562 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27566 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27567 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27568 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27569 as the formula number:
27572 \begin_layout Standard
27573 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27576 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27583 \begin_layout Standard
27584 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27585 's cross-reference box are described in section
27586 \begin_inset space ~
27590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27592 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27597 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27605 \begin_layout Section
27606 User defined math macros
27607 \begin_inset Index idx
27610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27619 \begin_layout Standard
27621 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27622 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27623 Math macros are explained in section
27626 \begin_inset space ~
27638 \begin_layout Section
27642 \begin_layout Subsection
27644 \begin_inset Index idx
27647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27656 \begin_layout Standard
27657 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27658 To set a font in a formula, use the
27661 \begin_inset space ~
27669 arg "math-insert \\font"
27672 , or enter its command, listed in table
27673 \begin_inset space ~
27677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27679 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27686 \begin_layout Standard
27687 \begin_inset Float table
27694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27695 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27700 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27704 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27714 \begin_inset Tabular
27715 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27716 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27717 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27718 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27750 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27777 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27804 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27837 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27864 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27891 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27925 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27952 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27986 \begin_layout Standard
27987 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27995 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28011 \begin_layout Standard
28012 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28013 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28018 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28019 space when you need a space in the box.
28020 Here is an example where
28021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28032 denotes the set of numbers:
28033 \begin_inset Formula
28035 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28043 \begin_layout Standard
28044 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28045 You can, for example, put a character in
28054 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28058 \begin_inset Newline newline
28061 So it is better not to use this feature.
28064 \begin_layout Standard
28065 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28066 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28070 \begin_inset Newline newline
28073 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28079 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28080 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28086 \begin_layout Standard
28093 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28096 \begin_layout Standard
28097 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28099 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28100 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28102 \begin_inset space ~
28110 \begin_layout Subsection
28112 \begin_inset Index idx
28115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28124 \begin_layout Standard
28125 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28127 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28131 \begin_inset space ~
28135 \begin_inset space ~
28143 \begin_inset space ~
28151 arg "math-insert \\font"
28155 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28156 in black instead of blue.
28157 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28158 Here is an example:
28159 \begin_inset Formula
28162 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28163 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28172 \begin_layout Subsection
28174 \begin_inset Index idx
28177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28186 \begin_layout Standard
28187 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28188 automatically chosen in most situations.
28206 For most characters,
28214 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28215 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28220 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28221 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28222 thinks are appropriate.
28223 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28226 arg "math-insert \\style"
28230 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28231 For example, you can set
28232 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28235 , which is normally in
28244 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28248 The four styles are used in the following example:
28251 \begin_layout Standard
28252 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28256 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28260 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28264 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28270 \begin_layout Standard
28271 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28272 is set in a particular size with the menu
28274 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28276 \begin_inset space ~
28281 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28282 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28283 will be adjusted to correspond.
28284 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28295 \begin_layout Standard
28299 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28305 \begin_layout Section
28306 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28308 \begin_inset Index idx
28311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28318 \begin_inset Index idx
28321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28330 \begin_layout Standard
28332 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28333 that are in common use.
28336 \begin_layout Subsection
28337 Enabling AMS-Support
28340 \begin_layout Standard
28341 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28342 the document by selecting the checkbox
28345 \begin_inset space ~
28349 \begin_inset space ~
28353 \begin_inset space ~
28360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28364 \begin_inset Index idx
28367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28368 Document ! Settings
28376 \begin_inset space ~
28382 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28383 -errors in formulas,
28384 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28387 \begin_layout Subsection
28389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28391 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28396 \begin_inset Index idx
28399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28400 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28408 \begin_layout Standard
28409 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28410 provides a selection of different formula types.
28412 allows you to choose between
28433 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28434 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28441 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28444 \begin_layout Chapter
28448 \begin_layout Section
28450 \begin_inset Index idx
28453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28462 name "sec:Cross-References"
28469 \begin_layout Standard
28470 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28471 's strengths is cross-references.
28472 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28474 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28475 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28476 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28479 \begin_layout Enumerate
28483 \begin_layout Enumerate
28484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28486 name "enu:Second-item"
28493 \begin_layout Enumerate
28497 \begin_layout Standard
28498 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28503 or by pressing the toolbar button
28510 A gray label box like this:
28511 \begin_inset Graphics
28512 filename clipart/label.png
28516 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28518 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28553 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28554 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28570 \begin_layout Standard
28571 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28573 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28576 or the toolbar button
28579 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28583 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28584 \begin_inset Graphics
28585 filename clipart/reference.png
28589 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28591 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28604 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28608 \begin_layout Standard
28609 As an alternative to
28611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28614 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28619 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28620 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28622 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28634 \begin_layout Standard
28635 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28636 \begin_inset space ~
28640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28642 reference "enu:Second-item"
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28650 It is recommended to use a protected space
28654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28655 described in section
28656 \begin_inset space ~
28660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28662 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28671 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28672 line breaks between them.
28675 \begin_layout Standard
28676 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28679 \begin_layout Description
28680 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28683 reference "fig:Two-images"
28690 \begin_layout Description
28691 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28692 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28704 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28711 \begin_layout Description
28712 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28713 \begin_inset space ~
28717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28718 LatexCommand pageref
28719 reference "fig:Two-images"
28726 \begin_layout Description
28728 \begin_inset space ~
28732 \begin_inset space ~
28735 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28737 LatexCommand vpageref
28738 reference "fig:Two-images"
28743 \begin_inset Newline newline
28746 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28747 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28748 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28749 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28750 it prints “on the next page”.
28751 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28754 \begin_layout Description
28756 \begin_inset space ~
28760 \begin_inset space ~
28764 \begin_inset space ~
28767 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28770 reference "fig:Two-images"
28775 \begin_inset Newline newline
28778 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28784 ; otherwise it behaves like
28788 \begin_inset space ~
28792 \begin_inset space ~
28801 \begin_layout Description
28803 \begin_inset space ~
28806 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28807 \begin_inset Newline newline
28811 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28819 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28829 \begin_inset Index idx
28832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28834 packages ! prettyref
28840 \begin_inset Index idx
28843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28845 packages ! refstyle
28856 \begin_inset Newline newline
28859 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28860 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28863 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28867 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28868 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28876 is the default and preferred because
28880 supports only English documents.
28881 The format is specified by using the command
28893 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28894 preamble of the document.
28895 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28913 \begin_inset Newline newline
28920 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28925 \begin_inset Newline newline
28936 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28937 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28939 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28940 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28945 , you might do so as follows:
28946 \begin_inset Newline newline
28953 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28958 \begin_inset Newline newline
28961 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28962 the package documentation
28963 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28965 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28971 \begin_inset Newline newline
28982 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28989 \begin_layout Description
28991 \begin_inset space ~
28994 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
28995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28996 LatexCommand nameref
28997 reference "fig:Two-images"
29004 \begin_layout Description
29006 \begin_inset space ~
29009 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29010 label for the reference:
29011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29012 LatexCommand labelonly
29013 reference "fig:Two-images"
29018 \begin_inset Newline newline
29021 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29022 Code, if you want to issue a command
29023 that \SpecialChar LyX
29029 , then you may want to use the
29032 \begin_inset space ~
29037 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29047 This is the form needed for e.
29048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29052 \begin_inset space \space{}
29059 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29060 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29062 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29066 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29070 \begin_layout Standard
29071 You can only use the style
29075 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29079 is always possible.
29082 \begin_layout Standard
29083 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29084 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29086 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29087 \begin_inset space ~
29091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29093 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29100 \begin_layout Standard
29101 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29105 \begin_inset space ~
29109 \begin_inset space ~
29114 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29115 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29118 \begin_inset space ~
29123 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29124 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29127 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29133 \begin_layout Standard
29134 You can change labels at any time.
29135 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29136 do not need to think about this.
29139 \begin_layout Standard
29140 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29142 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29146 \begin_layout Standard
29147 References are described in detail in the section
29148 \begin_inset space ~
29158 \begin_inset space ~
29166 \begin_layout Section
29167 Table of Contents and other Listings
29168 \begin_inset Index idx
29171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29178 \begin_inset Index idx
29181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29182 Navigating ! Outline
29188 \begin_inset Index idx
29191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29198 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29207 \begin_layout Subsection
29209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29211 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29218 \begin_layout Standard
29219 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29221 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29222 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29224 \begin_inset space ~
29228 \begin_inset space ~
29234 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29236 If you click on it, the
29240 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29241 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29242 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29244 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29246 \begin_inset space ~
29251 that is described in section
29252 \begin_inset space ~
29256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29258 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29265 \begin_layout Standard
29266 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29267 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29269 \begin_inset space ~
29273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29275 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29279 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29281 \begin_inset space ~
29285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29287 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29291 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29293 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29296 \begin_layout Subsection
29297 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29300 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29307 \begin_layout Standard
29308 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29310 You can insert them via the
29312 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29316 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29319 \begin_layout Section
29320 URLs and Hyperlinks
29321 \begin_inset Index idx
29324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29331 \begin_inset Index idx
29334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29343 \begin_layout Subsection
29345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29354 \begin_layout Standard
29355 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29363 \begin_layout Standard
29364 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29366 \begin_inset Flex URL
29369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29371 https://www.lyx.org
29379 \begin_layout Standard
29380 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29386 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29390 \begin_layout Standard
29391 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29399 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29408 \begin_layout Subsection
29410 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29412 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29419 \begin_layout Standard
29420 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29422 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29425 or with the toolbar button
29432 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29441 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29442 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29445 name "LyX's homepage"
29446 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29451 , an Email address like this:
29452 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29454 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29455 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29461 , or a link to a file.
29466 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29474 \begin_layout Standard
29475 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29488 to the link target.
29491 \begin_layout Standard
29492 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29493 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29494 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29495 the text style dialog.
29496 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29500 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29502 name "LyX's homepage"
29503 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29511 \begin_layout Standard
29512 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29516 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29519 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29523 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29525 \begin_inset Newline newline
29533 \begin_inset Newline newline
29540 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29543 \begin_layout Section
29545 \begin_inset Index idx
29548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29557 name "sec:Appendices"
29564 \begin_layout Standard
29565 Appendices are created with the menu
29567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29569 \begin_inset space ~
29573 \begin_inset space ~
29579 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29580 as the appendix part of the book.
29581 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29584 \begin_layout Standard
29585 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29586 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29587 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29588 and the subsection number.
29589 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29593 \begin_layout Standard
29595 \begin_inset space ~
29599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29601 reference "chap:Credits"
29606 \begin_inset space ~
29610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29612 reference "subsec:Export"
29619 \begin_layout Section
29621 \begin_inset Index idx
29624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29633 name "sec:Bibliography"
29640 \begin_layout Standard
29641 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29643 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29644 \begin_inset space ~
29648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29650 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29657 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29662 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29663 \begin_inset space ~
29667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29669 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29674 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29675 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29676 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29680 using a bibliography database.
29683 \begin_layout Standard
29684 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29685 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29689 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29690 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29691 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29692 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29693 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29696 \begin_layout Subsection
29697 The Bibliography Environment
29698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29700 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29707 \begin_layout Standard
29712 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29714 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29723 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29725 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29726 of ASCII characters only.
29730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29732 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29735 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29741 \begin_inset Newline newline
29745 \begin_inset Flex URL
29748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29750 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
29760 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29770 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29771 \begin_inset Newline newline
29778 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29779 the number of the entry.
29784 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29793 \begin_layout Standard
29794 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29799 or the toolbar button
29802 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29806 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29807 containing the available citations.
29808 Select one or more keys from the list and
29818 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29819 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29823 \begin_layout Standard
29824 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29825 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29826 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29838 \begin_layout Standard
29842 Companion Second Edition
29845 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29847 key "latexcompanion"
29855 \begin_layout Standard
29856 The \SpecialChar LyX
29857 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29858 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29868 \begin_layout Standard
29869 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29876 \begin_inset Index idx
29879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29887 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29899 Author A and Author B(Year)
29900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29907 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29909 Then, if you select
29912 \begin_inset space ~
29917 in the document settings
29918 \begin_inset Index idx
29921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29922 Document ! Settings
29929 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29931 \begin_inset space ~
29937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29939 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29946 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29949 \begin_layout Standard
29950 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29953 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29955 \begin_inset space ~
29963 arg "layout-paragraph"
29967 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29970 \begin_layout Subsection
29971 Bibliography databases
29972 \begin_inset Index idx
29975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29976 Bibliography ! Databases
29982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29984 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29991 \begin_layout Standard
29992 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29998 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30000 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30001 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30006 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30008 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30009 your working field in a database.
30010 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30011 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30012 list for that document.
30013 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30017 \begin_layout Standard
30018 The database is a text file with the file extension
30019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30030 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30031 The format is explained in
30032 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30039 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30041 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30043 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30049 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30050 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30051 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30053 \begin_inset Flex URL
30056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30058 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30066 \begin_layout Standard
30068 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30069 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30070 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30072 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30074 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30075 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30076 Those are addressed by
30081 \begin_inset Index idx
30084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30086 packages ! biblatex
30092 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30093 (although it has been significantly
30094 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30104 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30105 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30106 might conversely fail to correctly
30107 handle databases that use specific
30116 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30120 \begin_layout Standard
30121 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30126 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30132 \begin_inset Index idx
30135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30136 Document ! Settings
30148 \begin_inset space ~
30153 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30161 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30162 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30164 \begin_inset Index idx
30167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30168 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30177 \begin_layout Standard
30178 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30181 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30186 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30188 \begin_inset space ~
30194 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30195 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30203 Add bibliography to TOC
30205 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30210 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30211 in the document or just the cited references.
30213 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30218 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30219 differ from the encoding of the document.
30224 \begin_layout Standard
30225 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30226 style file is a text file with the file extension
30227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30238 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30239 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30240 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30241 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30243 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30249 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30250 \begin_inset Newline newline
30254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30256 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30266 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30271 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30275 \begin_layout Standard
30276 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30279 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30281 \begin_inset Index idx
30284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30285 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30291 \begin_inset Index idx
30294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30296 packages ! biblatex
30304 \begin_layout Standard
30305 Accessing a database via
30309 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30312 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30317 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30319 \begin_inset space ~
30325 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30326 you cannot select a
30331 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30335 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30338 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30339 As for the styles, note the following.
30344 \begin_layout Standard
30349 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30362 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30363 file (text file with the file extension
30364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30375 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30376 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30378 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30382 \begin_layout Standard
30387 styles are not set in the
30390 \begin_inset space ~
30395 dialog, but in the document settings.
30396 \begin_inset Index idx
30399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30400 Document ! Settings
30405 However, in the dialog in the
30409 field, which is only visible if you use
30413 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30414 example how its heading will appear).
30415 These options are described in detail in the
30420 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30430 \begin_layout Standard
30431 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30432 \begin_inset space ~
30436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30438 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30448 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30449 Bibliography Processors
30452 \begin_layout Standard
30453 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30454 uses a bibliography processor,
30455 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30456 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30457 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30459 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30460 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30463 \begin_layout Standard
30464 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30466 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30467 You can do this on a general level in
30469 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30470 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30471 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30474 or for individual documents in
30476 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30477 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30481 The following variants are available by default:
30484 \begin_layout Description
30485 biber a specific, modern processor
30486 \begin_inset Index idx
30489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30496 developed exclusively for
30500 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30506 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30511 makes use of; if you use the
30515 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30522 \begin_layout Description
30523 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30524 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30525 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30529 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30532 \begin_layout Description
30533 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30534 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30538 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30542 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30546 features are supported.
30549 \begin_layout Standard
30550 By default (with the
30556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30557 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30570 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30571 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30572 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30575 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30576 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30589 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30590 -based bibliography styles).
30591 This should suit most needs.
30594 \begin_layout Standard
30595 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30596 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30597 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30602 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30603 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30604 You can adjust it in
30606 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30607 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30608 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30614 \begin_layout Standard
30615 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30616 can add below the selection.
30617 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30618 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30624 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30638 \begin_layout Standard
30640 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30642 These are explained in detail in section
30644 Customizing Bibliographies
30648 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30653 Additional Features
30658 \begin_layout Subsection
30660 \begin_inset Index idx
30663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30664 Bibliography ! Citation format
30670 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30672 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30679 \begin_layout Standard
30680 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30681 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30685 \begin_inset space \space{}
30688 numerical citation (as
30689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30696 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30704 ) or author-year citations (as
30705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30714 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30718 \begin_layout Standard
30719 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30722 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30723 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30727 \begin_inset Index idx
30730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30731 Document ! Settings
30736 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30742 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30743 labels, is there to use
30746 \begin_inset space ~
30757 \begin_inset space ~
30762 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30765 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30772 \begin_layout Standard
30773 With a bibliography database (see
30774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30776 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30783 ) one has in contrary to the
30787 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30788 These style formats are available:
30791 \begin_layout Description
30793 \begin_inset space ~
30796 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30797 -based approached without any additional packages
30798 (simple numeric citations).
30801 \begin_layout Description
30802 Biblatex loads the package
30807 \begin_inset Index idx
30810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30812 packages ! biblatex
30817 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30819 Biblatex citation style
30823 Biblatex bibliography style
30826 Options to the package
30830 can be entered in the
30837 \begin_layout Description
30839 \begin_inset space ~
30843 \begin_inset space ~
30846 mode) loads the package
30850 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30851 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30863 behavior very closely.
30868 this option has some additional styles.
30873 styles are also supported by this variant.
30876 \begin_layout Description
30878 \begin_inset space ~
30881 (BibTeX) loads the package
30886 \begin_inset Index idx
30889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30896 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30899 \begin_layout Description
30901 \begin_inset space ~
30904 (BibTeX) loads the package
30909 \begin_inset Index idx
30912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30919 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30922 \begin_layout Standard
30931 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30933 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30942 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30944 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30945 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30947 Biblatex citation style
30950 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30956 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30960 \begin_layout Standard
30961 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30962 are available in the
30967 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30968 a name prefix such as
30969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30984 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30989 \begin_inset space \space{}
30993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31004 \begin_layout Standard
31005 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31011 \begin_inset space \space{}
31014 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31020 \begin_inset space \space{}
31024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31036 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31040 \begin_inset space ~
31048 \begin_inset space ~
31054 Here is a simple example where the text
31055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31059 \begin_inset space ~
31063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31066 appears after the reference:
31069 \begin_layout Quote
31071 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31074 key "latexcompanion"
31082 \begin_layout Standard
31083 All styles except for
31087 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31097 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31101 \begin_layout Standard
31102 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31103 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31104 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31109 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31110 multi-citation (so-called
31111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31114 qualified citation lists
31115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31121 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31126 dialog will display three columns in the field
31133 \begin_inset space ~
31141 \begin_inset space ~
31149 \begin_inset space ~
31155 If you double-click on an item's
31158 \begin_inset space ~
31166 \begin_inset space ~
31171 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31174 General text before
31180 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31183 \begin_layout Section
31185 \begin_inset Index idx
31188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31204 \begin_layout Standard
31205 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31209 \begin_inset space ~
31214 or the toolbar button
31221 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31222 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31223 by \SpecialChar LyX
31224 as the index entry.
31227 \begin_layout Standard
31228 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31231 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31233 \begin_inset space ~
31239 A light blue box labeled
31240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31251 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31252 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31256 \begin_layout Standard
31257 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31258 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31259 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31260 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31262 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31264 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31272 \begin_layout Subsection
31273 Grouping Index Entries
31274 \begin_inset Index idx
31277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31286 \begin_layout Standard
31287 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31289 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31290 lists under the entry
31291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31299 First we create the entry
31300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31308 \begin_inset space ~
31312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31314 reference "subsec:Lists"
31319 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31320 \begin_inset space ~
31324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31326 reference "sec:Itemize"
31330 , we insert the command
31333 \begin_layout Standard
31339 \begin_layout Standard
31343 \begin_layout Standard
31349 \begin_layout Standard
31350 for the enumerated list in section
31351 \begin_inset space ~
31355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31357 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31364 \begin_layout Standard
31365 The exclamation mark
31366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31373 marks the grouping levels.
31374 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31375 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31376 If we don't have an index entry for
31377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31384 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31387 \begin_layout Subsection
31389 \begin_inset Index idx
31392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31393 Index ! Page ranges
31401 \begin_layout Standard
31402 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31404 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31405 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31406 an index entry in section
31407 \begin_inset space ~
31411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31413 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31420 \begin_layout Standard
31423 Paragraph environments|(
31426 \begin_layout Standard
31427 and another entry at the end of section
31428 \begin_inset space ~
31432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31434 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31441 \begin_layout Standard
31444 Paragraph environments|)
31447 \begin_layout Standard
31449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31472 respectively start and end the index range.
31473 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31474 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31475 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31476 An example is the index entry
31477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31480 Document ! Settings
31481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31487 \begin_layout Subsection
31489 \begin_inset Index idx
31492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31493 Index ! Cross referencing
31501 \begin_layout Standard
31502 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31503 We referred for example in the index entry
31504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31512 \begin_inset space ~
31516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31518 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31522 ) to the index entry
31523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31530 in the same section using the entry
31533 \begin_layout Standard
31536 GIF|see{Image formats}
31539 \begin_layout Standard
31540 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31542 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31543 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31546 \begin_layout Subsection
31548 \begin_inset Index idx
31551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31552 Index ! Entry order
31560 \begin_layout Standard
31561 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31562 follow the rules for the index order.
31563 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31569 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31571 \begin_inset space ~
31575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31577 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31586 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31587 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31612 \begin_inset Index idx
31615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31616 Dummy entries ! maïs
31622 \begin_inset Index idx
31625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31626 Dummy entries ! maître
31632 \begin_inset Index idx
31635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31636 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31641 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31642 maïs, maison, maître.
31643 To achieve this, we use the command
31646 \begin_layout Standard
31649 previous entry@current entry
31652 \begin_layout Standard
31653 In our case we want to have
31654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31669 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31672 \begin_layout Standard
31678 \begin_layout Standard
31679 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31680 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31682 See the next subsection for an example.
31685 \begin_layout Subsection
31687 \begin_inset Index idx
31690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31691 Index ! Entry layout
31699 \begin_layout Standard
31700 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31701 \begin_inset Index idx
31704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31707 This is an italic dummy entry
31712 You can also format the page number using the character
31713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31720 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31721 -command without a backslash.
31722 We can write for example
31725 \begin_layout Standard
31728 italic page number:|textit
31731 \begin_layout Standard
31732 to get the page number in italic.
31733 \begin_inset Index idx
31736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31737 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31742 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31743 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31761 \begin_inset space ~
31767 Have a look at section
31768 \begin_inset space ~
31772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31774 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31778 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31782 \begin_layout Standard
31783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31791 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31795 to generate the index, see section
31796 \begin_inset space ~
31800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31802 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31811 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31816 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31817 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31820 key "latexcompanion"
31833 \begin_layout Standard
31834 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31836 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31837 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31838 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31839 If so, put the following in the preamble
31842 \begin_layout Standard
31854 \begin_layout Standard
31858 \begin_layout Standard
31864 \begin_layout Standard
31865 in the index entry.
31866 \begin_inset Index idx
31869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31870 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31875 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31876 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31877 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31880 \begin_layout Standard
31881 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31882 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31883 a bold font for all index entries.
31884 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31896 documentation for details,
31897 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31899 key "makeindex,xindy"
31907 \begin_layout Subsection
31909 \begin_inset Index idx
31912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31921 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31928 \begin_layout Standard
31929 If the index generation program
31933 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31934 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31938 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31939 distribution, is used.
31943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31948 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31949 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31950 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31951 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31952 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31962 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31964 dialog, see section
31965 \begin_inset space ~
31969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31971 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31976 The available options are listed and explained in
31977 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31979 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31985 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31989 \begin_layout Standard
31990 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31991 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31995 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31999 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32000 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32003 \begin_layout Subsection
32007 \begin_layout Standard
32008 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32009 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32017 next to the standard index.
32019 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32020 that add this feature.
32027 \begin_inset Index idx
32030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32032 packages ! splitidx
32037 package to generate multiple indexes.
32038 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32044 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32046 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32054 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32055 style, but it also includes
32056 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32057 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32065 \begin_layout Standard
32066 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32067 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32069 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32070 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32073 and select the option
32075 Use multiple Indexes
32082 already contains the standard index
32083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32091 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32092 also appear as a heading) to the
32096 input field and press the
32101 The new index now also appears in the list.
32102 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32103 label color to the new index.
32106 \begin_layout Standard
32107 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32110 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32117 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32118 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32119 are additional features:
32122 \begin_layout Itemize
32123 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32124 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32127 \begin_layout Itemize
32128 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32129 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32134 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32135 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32136 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32137 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32140 \begin_layout Itemize
32145 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32146 code in the name of the index.
32149 \begin_layout Section
32150 Nomenclature/Glossary
32151 \begin_inset Index idx
32154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32161 \begin_inset Index idx
32164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32193 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32195 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32202 \begin_layout Standard
32203 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32204 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32205 called nomenclature or glossary.
32208 \begin_layout Standard
32209 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32216 \begin_inset Index idx
32219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32227 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32229 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32236 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32240 \begin_layout Standard
32241 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32242 and then use the menu
32244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32250 \begin_inset space ~
32255 or the toolbar button
32258 arg "nomencl-insert"
32263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32274 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32277 \begin_layout Standard
32278 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32279 The first is the term or
32283 that you wish to define.
32288 of the term or symbol.
32291 \begin_layout Standard
32292 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32300 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32301 code for nomenclature entries the option
32305 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32313 \begin_layout Subsection
32314 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32315 \begin_inset Index idx
32318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32319 Nomenclature ! Layout
32327 \begin_layout Standard
32328 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32332 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32339 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32347 \begin_inset Newline newline
32355 \begin_inset Newline newline
32361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32368 character starts/ends the formula.
32369 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32370 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32382 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32392 \begin_layout Standard
32393 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32394 syntax is given in section
32395 \begin_inset space ~
32399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32401 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32408 \begin_layout Standard
32412 \begin_inset space ~
32417 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32419 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32424 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32431 in this document is:
32432 \begin_inset Newline newline
32437 dummy entry for the character
32442 \begin_inset Newline newline
32454 \begin_inset space ~
32464 font use the command
32493 \begin_layout Standard
32494 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32499 \begin_inset space \space{}
32503 \begin_inset Newline newline
32519 \begin_inset Newline newline
32522 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32523 This command will make the font of all symbols
32530 \begin_inset space ~
32538 \begin_layout Standard
32539 If the characters |
32540 \begin_inset space \space{}
32544 \begin_inset space \space{}
32548 \begin_inset space \space{}
32552 \begin_inset space \space{}
32556 \begin_inset space \space{}
32559 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32560 code they need to be escaped
32561 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32562 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32563 LatexCommand nomenclature
32564 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32565 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32573 \begin_layout Subsection
32574 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32575 \begin_inset Index idx
32578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32579 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32587 \begin_layout Standard
32588 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32589 -code of the symbol
32591 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32593 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32596 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32597 LatexCommand nomenclature
32599 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32607 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32611 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32612 LatexCommand nomenclature
32615 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32621 They will be sorted by
32622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32648 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32651 will be sorted before the
32655 since the character
32656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32663 is considered in sorting.
32666 \begin_layout Standard
32667 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32670 \begin_inset space ~
32675 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32676 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32678 For the example given, you can insert
32682 in this field for the
32683 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32690 will be located before
32691 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32697 \begin_layout Standard
32698 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32703 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32713 \begin_layout Subsection
32714 Nomenclature Options
32715 \begin_inset Index idx
32718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32719 Nomenclature ! Options
32725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32727 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32734 \begin_layout Standard
32739 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32740 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32743 \begin_layout Description
32744 refeq Appends the phrase
32745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32760 to every nomenclature entry, where
32766 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32769 \begin_layout Description
32770 refpage Appends the phrase
32771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32786 to every nomenclature entry, where
32792 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32795 \begin_layout Description
32796 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32799 \begin_layout Standard
32800 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32801 class options list in the
32803 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32807 In this document the options
32814 \begin_layout Standard
32815 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32821 \begin_layout Standard
32822 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32823 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32828 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32831 \begin_layout Description
32841 \begin_layout Description
32844 nomrefpage Like the
32851 \begin_layout Description
32854 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
32863 \begin_layout Description
32867 \begin_inset space ~
32873 \begin_inset space ~
32878 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
32881 \begin_layout Standard
32883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32890 are automatically translated for most document languages.
32891 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
32895 \begin_layout Standard
32904 \begin_inset Newline newline
32910 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32914 \begin_inset space ~
32926 unskip, see equation
32929 \begin_inset Newline newline
32936 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32937 \begin_inset Newline newline
32943 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32947 \begin_inset space ~
32964 \begin_layout Standard
32965 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
32968 \begin_inset space ~
32973 in the document settings under
32976 \begin_inset space ~
32984 \begin_layout Standard
32992 \begin_inset Newline newline
32996 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33000 \begin_inset space ~
33012 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33014 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33015 \begin_inset Newline newline
33022 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33023 \begin_inset Newline newline
33027 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33031 \begin_inset space ~
33043 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33048 \begin_layout Subsection
33049 Printing the Nomenclature
33050 \begin_inset Index idx
33053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33054 Nomenclature ! Printing
33062 \begin_layout Standard
33063 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33065 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33066 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
33071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33082 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33083 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33084 You can choose between these settings:
33087 \begin_layout Description
33088 Default a space of 1
33089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33095 \begin_layout Description
33097 \begin_inset space ~
33101 \begin_inset space ~
33104 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33107 \begin_layout Description
33108 Custom custom space
33111 \begin_layout Standard
33112 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33121 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33129 For example, in order to change the name to
33133 , add the following line to the preamble:
33136 \begin_layout Standard
33149 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33152 \begin_layout Standard
33153 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33154 \begin_inset Newline newline
33169 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33172 \begin_layout Subsection
33173 Nomenclature Program
33174 \begin_inset Index idx
33177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33178 Nomenclature ! Program
33184 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33186 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33193 \begin_layout Standard
33199 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33200 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33202 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33207 by adding options, see section
33208 \begin_inset space ~
33212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33214 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33219 The available options are listed and explained in
33220 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33222 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33230 \begin_layout Section
33232 \begin_inset Index idx
33235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33242 \begin_inset Index idx
33245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33246 Document ! Branches
33252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33254 name "sec:Branches"
33261 \begin_layout Standard
33262 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33263 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33264 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33265 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33268 \begin_layout Standard
33269 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33270 allows you to put text into branches.
33271 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33272 To create a branch, either select the menu
33274 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33275 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33278 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33280 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33287 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33288 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33289 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33290 and whether the name of the branch should
33291 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33292 (see below for an example).
33293 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33294 to the name of the other) and to add
33295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33307 \begin_inset space ~
33310 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33311 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33314 \begin_layout Standard
33315 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33316 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33321 where you can choose a branch.
33322 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33326 \begin_layout Standard
33327 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33328 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33331 \begin_layout Standard
33332 \begin_inset Branch Question
33336 \begin_layout Standard
33341 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33349 \begin_layout Standard
33350 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33354 \begin_layout Standard
33359 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33367 \begin_layout Standard
33374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33375 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33378 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33379 Consider for example a file
33380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33387 which has the above branches.
33389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33396 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33420 branch were inactive,
33421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33436 branch was active, likewise
33437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33452 branch was active, and
33453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33456 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33460 if both branches were active.
33461 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33462 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33468 \begin_layout Standard
33469 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33475 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33476 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33480 \begin_inset space ~
33488 \begin_layout Standard
33489 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33493 \begin_layout Standard
33499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33506 branch is deactivated.
33512 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33518 \begin_layout Standard
33519 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33520 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33521 definitions for each branch.
33522 For example you can define for the question branch
33526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33527 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33528 -syntax, see section
33529 \begin_inset space ~
33533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33535 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33547 \begin_layout Standard
33557 \begin_layout Standard
33567 \begin_layout Standard
33568 and for the answer branch
33571 \begin_layout Standard
33581 \begin_layout Standard
33591 \begin_layout Standard
33592 \begin_inset Branch Question
33596 \begin_layout Standard
33600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33628 \begin_layout Standard
33629 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33633 \begin_layout Standard
33637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33665 \begin_layout Standard
33666 Now it is possible to use the
33670 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33677 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33680 commands to obtain conditional output.
33681 Here is an example formula where only the
33688 \begin_inset Formula
33690 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33698 \begin_layout Standard
33699 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33707 \begin_layout Standard
33708 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33714 \begin_inset space \space{}
33717 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33719 For this advanced usage, see the
33725 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33730 \begin_layout Section
33732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33734 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33739 \begin_inset Index idx
33742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33751 \begin_layout Standard
33754 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33755 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33758 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33760 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33766 \begin_inset Index idx
33769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33771 packages ! hyperref
33776 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
33777 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
33778 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
33779 part of the document.
33783 \begin_layout Standard
33784 The header information in the dialog tab
33788 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33789 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33790 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33791 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33795 \begin_inset space ~
33799 \begin_inset space ~
33804 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33805 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33806 and author entries.
33810 \begin_inset space ~
33814 \begin_inset space ~
33818 \begin_inset space ~
33823 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
33826 \begin_layout Standard
33827 You can specify in the dialog tab
33831 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
33836 \begin_inset space ~
33840 \begin_inset space ~
33844 \begin_inset space ~
33849 option allows long links to be split;
33852 \begin_inset space ~
33856 \begin_inset space ~
33860 \begin_inset space ~
33868 \begin_inset space ~
33873 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
33876 \begin_inset space ~
33881 colors the different links.
33882 The default colors are:
33885 \begin_layout Labeling
33886 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33891 for hyperlinks and URLs
33894 \begin_layout Labeling
33895 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33903 \begin_layout Labeling
33904 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33912 \begin_layout Standard
33913 but you can change these in the field
33918 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
33921 \begin_layout Standard
33924 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
33927 \begin_layout Standard
33932 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
33933 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
33934 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
33937 \begin_layout Standard
33942 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
33943 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
33944 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
33954 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
33955 when opening the PDF.
33957 \begin_inset space ~
33960 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
33961 \begin_inset space ~
33964 1 will only display the sections.
33967 \begin_layout Standard
33968 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33969 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33975 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
33976 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33986 \begin_layout Section
33988 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33992 name "sec:TeX-Code"
33999 \begin_layout Subsection
34002 \begin_inset Index idx
34005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34015 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34022 \begin_layout Standard
34023 As \SpecialChar LyX
34024 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34025 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34026 commands and constructs,
34029 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34030 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34031 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34032 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34033 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34034 cannot support all packages and
34038 \begin_layout Standard
34039 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34040 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34041 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34045 Code box is created by the menu
34047 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34049 \begin_inset space ~
34054 or by the toolbar button
34067 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34075 \begin_layout Standard
34076 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34078 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34080 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34085 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34090 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34097 , you can write the command part
34103 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34104 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34108 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34109 Code box behind the word.
34110 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34111 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34115 \begin_layout Standard
34116 \begin_inset Graphics
34117 filename clipart/ERT.png
34125 \begin_layout Standard
34129 \begin_layout Standard
34130 This is a line with a
34134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34157 \begin_layout Standard
34158 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34166 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34167 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34168 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34169 know that the command is finished.
34177 \begin_layout Subsection
34178 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34180 \begin_inset Argument 1
34183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34184 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34191 \begin_inset Index idx
34194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34204 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34211 \begin_layout Standard
34212 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34213 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34214 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34215 uses in the background.
34216 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34217 is based on commands, you can
34218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34226 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34227 any time if you know the right commands.
34228 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34229 is the end of the day.
34230 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34231 all caption labels bold.
34232 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34234 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34238 \begin_layout Standard
34239 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34241 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34243 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34246 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34256 \begin_layout Standard
34257 As result you find that the package
34262 \begin_inset Index idx
34265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34273 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34275 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34278 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34282 \begin_inset space ~
34290 \begin_layout Standard
34295 usepackage[options]{package name}
34298 \begin_layout Standard
34299 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34300 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34301 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34302 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34305 \begin_layout Standard
34306 In your case the package name is
34311 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34316 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34317 So you add the command
34320 \begin_layout Standard
34325 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34328 \begin_layout Standard
34329 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34334 For more commands provided by the
34338 package, have a look at its documentation,
34339 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34354 \begin_layout Standard
34355 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34357 For example if you use a
34361 class, you don't need the package
34365 , you can instead write
34368 \begin_layout Standard
34373 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34378 \begin_layout Standard
34379 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34380 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34381 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34388 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34391 \begin_layout Standard
34392 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34393 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34395 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34396 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34397 Code box as described in the previous
34401 \begin_layout Standard
34402 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34403 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34406 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34408 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34416 \begin_layout Standard
34417 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34423 \begin_layout Standard
34427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34437 \begin_inset Note Note
34440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34441 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34449 \begin_layout Left Header
34450 \begin_inset Argument 1
34453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34473 \begin_inset Note Note
34476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34477 defines the header line as described below
34485 \begin_layout Center Header
34486 \begin_inset Argument 1
34489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34498 \begin_layout Right Header
34499 \begin_inset Argument 1
34502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34523 \begin_layout Left Footer
34524 \begin_inset Argument 1
34527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34548 \begin_layout Center Footer
34549 \begin_inset Argument 1
34552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34564 \begin_inset Newline newline
34568 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34574 \begin_layout Right Footer
34575 \begin_inset Argument 1
34578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34600 \begin_layout Section
34601 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34604 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34609 \begin_inset Index idx
34612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34613 Document ! Header/Footer line
34619 \begin_inset Index idx
34622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34631 \begin_layout Standard
34632 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34636 \begin_inset space ~
34647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34653 \begin_inset space ~
34659 As a second step add in the menu
34661 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34662 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34671 Custom Header/Footerlines
34674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34678 This module offers the following 6
34679 \begin_inset space ~
34685 \begin_layout Description
34687 \begin_inset space ~
34691 \begin_inset space ~
34695 \begin_inset space ~
34699 \begin_inset space ~
34703 \begin_inset space ~
34709 \begin_layout Description
34711 \begin_inset space ~
34715 \begin_inset space ~
34719 \begin_inset space ~
34723 \begin_inset space ~
34727 \begin_inset space ~
34733 \begin_layout Standard
34734 for the different positions in the header/footer.
34735 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
34738 \begin_layout Standard
34739 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
34740 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
34742 \begin_inset space ~
34746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34748 reference "fig:Page-layout"
34752 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
34755 \begin_layout Standard
34756 \begin_inset Float figure
34763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34766 \begin_inset Tabular
34767 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
34768 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
34769 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34770 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34771 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34773 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
34785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34791 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34802 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34820 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34831 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
34834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34835 The normal text on the page goes here.
34836 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
34838 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
34839 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
34844 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34853 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34864 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34882 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34893 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
34905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34911 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34929 \begin_inset Caption Standard
34931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34934 name "fig:Page-layout"
34938 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
34951 \begin_layout Standard
34952 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34960 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
34964 \begin_inset space ~
34969 is set to “Default”.
34970 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
34979 \begin_layout Subsection
34983 \begin_layout Standard
34984 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
34985 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
34986 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
34987 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
34989 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
34991 Defining the footer line works similarly.
34994 \begin_layout Standard
34995 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
34996 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35002 \begin_inset space ~
35010 \begin_layout Description
35013 thepage prints the current page number
35016 \begin_layout Description
35019 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35022 \begin_layout Description
35025 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35028 \begin_layout Description
35031 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35032 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35039 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35042 because it usually goes in a left header.
35045 \begin_layout Description
35048 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35049 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35051 It is normally used in the right header.
35054 \begin_layout Subsection
35055 Default header/footer
35058 \begin_layout Standard
35059 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35060 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35061 footer has the page number.
35062 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35063 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35064 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35067 \begin_inset space ~
35075 \begin_layout Subsection
35079 \begin_layout Standard
35080 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35081 Some pages are different.
35082 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35083 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35084 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35085 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35086 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35090 Header and footer decoration line
35093 \begin_layout Standard
35094 By default, you get a 0.4
35095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35098 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35099 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35111 in the following way:
35114 \begin_layout Standard
35121 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35124 \begin_layout Standard
35125 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35138 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35145 \begin_layout Standard
35146 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35148 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35149 \begin_inset space ~
35153 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35164 Several header/footer lines
35167 \begin_layout Standard
35168 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35169 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35170 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35172 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35188 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35190 \begin_inset space ~
35198 \begin_layout Standard
35205 headheight}{height}
35208 \begin_layout Standard
35213 is a size in standard units (e.
35214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35218 \begin_inset space \space{}
35226 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35227 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35228 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35229 logfile with the menu
35231 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35233 \begin_inset space ~
35241 \begin_inset space ~
35246 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35251 \begin_inset Index idx
35254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35256 packages ! fancyhdr
35262 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35263 for your header/footer.
35266 \begin_layout Subsection
35270 \begin_layout Standard
35271 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35272 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35273 This example consists of the following definition:
35276 \begin_layout Description
35278 \begin_inset space ~
35287 , empty optional argument
35290 \begin_layout Description
35292 \begin_inset space ~
35295 Header empty, empty optional argument
35298 \begin_layout Description
35300 \begin_inset space ~
35309 in the optional argument
35312 \begin_layout Description
35314 \begin_inset space ~
35323 in the optional argument
35326 \begin_layout Description
35328 \begin_inset space ~
35341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35345 \begin_inset Newline newline
35349 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35356 in the optional argument
35359 \begin_layout Description
35361 \begin_inset space ~
35370 , empty optional argument
35373 \begin_layout Description
35376 headrulewidth set to 2
35377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35383 \begin_layout Standard
35384 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35385 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35391 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35401 \begin_layout Standard
35402 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35408 \begin_layout Standard
35412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35416 pagestyle{headings}
35422 \begin_inset Note Note
35425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35426 switches back to page style with the default headings
35434 \begin_layout Section
35435 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35436 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35438 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35443 \begin_inset Index idx
35446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35453 \begin_inset Index idx
35456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35465 \begin_layout Standard
35467 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35468 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35469 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35472 \begin_layout Subsection
35476 \begin_layout Standard
35477 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35483 \begin_inset Index idx
35486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35488 packages ! preview-latex
35493 (on some systems named simply
35498 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35500 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35507 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35509 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35517 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35518 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35519 -package are automatically
35520 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35524 \begin_layout Subsection
35528 \begin_layout Standard
35529 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35530 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35532 activate the option
35535 \begin_inset space ~
35542 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35548 \begin_inset space ~
35552 \begin_inset space ~
35555 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35562 \begin_inset space ~
35575 \begin_inset space ~
35580 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35583 \begin_layout Standard
35584 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35589 \begin_inset space ~
35597 \begin_inset space ~
35605 \begin_layout Standard
35606 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35607 and when you finish
35611 \begin_layout Standard
35612 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35620 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35621 generated by activating the option
35624 \begin_inset space ~
35630 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35638 \begin_layout Subsection
35639 Selected document parts
35642 \begin_layout Standard
35643 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35644 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35645 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35646 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35648 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35650 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35654 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35655 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35656 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35659 \begin_layout Standard
35660 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35667 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35679 is explained in section
35681 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
35686 \begin_inset space ~
35696 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
35697 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35698 the final rotated boxes,
35699 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
35700 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
35702 Here is the result:
35705 \begin_layout Standard
35706 \begin_inset Preview
35708 \begin_layout Standard
35713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35717 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
35723 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
35733 height_special "totalheight"
35738 backgroundcolor "none"
35741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35766 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
35772 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
35779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35794 \begin_layout Standard
35795 Previewing works also for colors.
35796 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35815 is explained in section
35822 \begin_inset space ~
35835 \begin_layout Standard
35836 \begin_inset Preview
35838 \begin_layout Standard
35842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35861 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
35866 This is text within a colored, framed box.
35870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35885 \begin_layout Standard
35886 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
35892 \begin_layout Standard
35893 If \SpecialChar LyX
35894 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
35895 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
35896 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
35897 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35898 packages in your document preamble that are required by
35899 the \SpecialChar TeX
35901 If \SpecialChar LyX
35902 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
35903 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
35905 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
35906 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
35907 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
35910 \begin_layout Subsection
35915 \begin_layout Standard
35916 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35917 source of the whole document or parts of it.
35920 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35922 \begin_inset space ~
35927 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35929 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
35931 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
35932 's main window, then only this selection
35933 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
35934 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
35935 the source view window.
35940 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
35941 ; but note that if you have
35942 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
35944 not just the one which is open at the time.
35947 \begin_layout Section
35948 Advanced Find and Replace
35949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35951 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35956 \begin_inset Index idx
35959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35966 \begin_inset Index idx
35969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35978 \begin_layout Subsection
35982 \begin_layout Standard
35983 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
35984 allows for searching of complex,
35985 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
35987 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
35988 The key-features are:
35991 \begin_layout Itemize
35992 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
35993 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
35994 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
35998 \begin_layout Itemize
35999 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36000 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36001 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36002 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36005 \begin_layout Itemize
36006 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36007 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36008 outside of mathematics environments
36011 \begin_layout Itemize
36012 Search may be widened to a specific
36017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36021 \begin_inset space ~
36024 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36025 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36032 \begin_layout Itemize
36033 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36034 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36039 \begin_inset space ~
36042 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36045 \begin_layout Subsection
36049 \begin_layout Standard
36050 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36052 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36068 ) or the toolbar button
36071 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36077 Advanced Find and Replace
36082 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36086 \begin_layout Standard
36092 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36096 \begin_inset space ~
36101 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36104 arg "paragraph-break"
36108 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36109 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36113 arg "paragraph-break"
36116 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36120 searches backwards.
36123 \begin_layout Standard
36127 \begin_inset space ~
36132 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36141 \begin_inset space ~
36146 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36150 Searching for mathematics
36153 \begin_layout Standard
36154 Mathematical formulas, such as
36155 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36158 or something more complex like
36159 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36162 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36167 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36168 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36169 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36170 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36180 \begin_layout Standard
36181 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36182 This is done by switching to the
36186 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36191 This way, entering in the
36198 \begin_layout Itemize
36199 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36200 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36203 \begin_layout Itemize
36204 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36205 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36208 \begin_layout Itemize
36209 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36210 of it only within section headings.
36211 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36212 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36216 \begin_layout Itemize
36217 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36218 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36221 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36225 \begin_layout Standard
36226 The entries made in the
36230 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36233 \begin_inset space ~
36239 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36243 button or alternatively press
36246 arg "paragraph-break"
36253 while the cursor is in the
36256 \begin_inset space ~
36264 \begin_layout Standard
36265 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36267 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36271 \begin_layout Itemize
36272 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36273 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36281 with its typewriter version
36282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36296 \begin_layout Itemize
36297 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36303 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36315 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36322 (you may want to enable the
36325 \begin_inset space ~
36333 \begin_inset space ~
36338 options and disable the
36346 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36354 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36355 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36359 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36362 , or occurrences of
36363 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36367 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36373 \begin_layout Subsection
36377 \begin_layout Standard
36378 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36383 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36385 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36387 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36397 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36403 This is done with the context menu
36405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36406 Insert Regular Expression
36408 while the cursor is in the
36413 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36414 expression matching rules
36418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36419 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36429 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36430 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36436 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36437 same text in the document.
36438 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36439 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36442 \begin_layout Enumerate
36443 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36448 editor the fraction
36449 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36453 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36456 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36457 fractions with the given denominator.
36460 \begin_layout Enumerate
36461 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36473 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36478 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36479 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36480 Also, by inserting a
36481 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36484 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36485 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36488 \begin_layout Standard
36489 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36490 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36491 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36494 , and referring back to them through
36495 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36499 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36503 For example, try searching with the regexp
36504 \begin_inset Newline newline
36507 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36510 \begin_inset Newline newline
36513 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36516 \begin_layout Standard
36517 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36520 \begin_layout Standard
36521 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36529 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36530 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36531 sub-expressions is absolute.
36533 \begin_inset space ~
36537 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36540 always refers to the first occurrence of
36541 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36544 in all entered regexps.
36552 \begin_layout Section
36554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36556 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36561 \begin_inset Index idx
36564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36573 \begin_layout Standard
36575 has a built-in spell checker.
36578 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36585 key or the toolbar button
36588 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36591 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36592 beginning of the currently selected text.
36593 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36594 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36595 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36596 scrolled so that it is visible.
36597 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36598 n, if any could be found.
36599 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36603 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36604 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36607 \begin_layout Standard
36608 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36611 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36615 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36616 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36618 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36619 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36622 \begin_inset space ~
36630 arg "dialog-show character"
36633 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36635 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36638 \begin_layout Standard
36639 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36640 can be downloaded from here:
36641 \begin_inset Newline newline
36645 \begin_inset Flex URL
36648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36650 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36656 \begin_inset Newline newline
36660 \begin_inset space ~
36663 files for each language.
36664 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36665 \begin_inset space ~
36668 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36669 's installation subfolder
36677 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36679 \begin_inset Newline newline
36682 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36683 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36684 but in most cases these are
36700 is the language code.
36703 \begin_layout Subsection
36707 \begin_layout Standard
36710 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36711 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36713 \begin_inset space ~
36716 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36719 you can set the following things:
36722 \begin_layout Description
36724 \begin_inset space ~
36727 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
36728 should use for spell checking.
36729 Depending on your platform,
36739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36740 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
36741 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
36756 \begin_inset space ~
36759 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
36762 \begin_layout Description
36764 \begin_inset space ~
36767 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
36768 will always use the given language
36769 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
36772 \begin_layout Description
36774 \begin_inset space ~
36777 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
36779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36783 \begin_inset space \space{}
36787 This should normally not be needed.
36790 \begin_layout Description
36792 \begin_inset space ~
36796 \begin_inset space ~
36799 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36811 \begin_layout Description
36813 \begin_inset space ~
36816 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
36817 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
36818 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
36819 appear in a context menu.
36820 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
36824 \begin_layout Description
36826 \begin_inset space ~
36830 \begin_inset space ~
36834 \begin_inset space ~
36837 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
36841 \begin_layout Section
36843 \begin_inset Index idx
36846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36855 name "sec:Thesaurus"
36862 \begin_layout Standard
36864 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
36865 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
36874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36875 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36877 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
36887 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
36889 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
36890 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
36891 which are available for many languages.
36894 \begin_layout Standard
36895 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
36896 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
36900 \begin_layout Subsection
36901 Setting up the thesaurus
36904 \begin_layout Standard
36913 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
36917 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
36922 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
36924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36928 \begin_inset space ~
36936 For instance, the US English files are named:
36939 \begin_layout Itemize
36943 \begin_layout Itemize
36947 \begin_layout Standard
36956 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
36957 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
36960 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36961 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36962 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36964 \begin_inset space ~
36969 ) to the path where they are installed.
36973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36974 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36975 ies, typical locations are
36981 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
36985 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
36989 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
36992 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
36998 LibreOffice-<Version>
37005 On the Mac, the default location is
37007 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37008 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37009 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37010 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37011 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37012 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37020 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37021 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37022 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37026 \begin_layout Standard
37027 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37028 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37030 \begin_inset Newline newline
37034 \begin_inset Flex URL
37037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37039 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37047 \begin_layout Standard
37048 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37049 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37051 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37052 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37053 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37055 \begin_inset space ~
37060 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37062 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37063 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37067 \begin_layout Standard
37068 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37070 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37073 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37079 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37082 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37083 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37091 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37092 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37093 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37095 \begin_inset space ~
37100 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37103 \begin_layout Subsection
37104 Using the thesaurus
37107 \begin_layout Standard
37108 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37110 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37113 or the toolbar button
37116 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37119 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37121 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37123 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37124 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37125 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37134 ), related terms (such as
37137 \begin_inset space ~
37146 ), compounds (such as
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37158 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37167 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37170 \begin_layout Standard
37171 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37172 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37176 \begin_layout Standard
37177 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37178 the dictionary, such as the above
37182 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37187 \begin_inset space \space{}
37190 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37191 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37192 For example, looking up the word form
37196 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37201 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37206 \begin_inset space \space{}
37217 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37218 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37219 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37222 \begin_layout Section
37224 \begin_inset Index idx
37227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37234 \begin_inset Index idx
37237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37238 Document ! Change Tracking
37244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37246 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37253 \begin_layout Standard
37254 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37255 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37256 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37257 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37261 \begin_inset space ~
37264 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37274 \begin_layout Standard
37275 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37289 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37290 You can change the color in
37292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37293 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37295 \begin_inset space ~
37299 \begin_inset space ~
37304 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37310 \begin_inset Index idx
37313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37314 Color ! Change tracking
37319 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37320 's status bar when the
37321 cursor is in changed text.
37322 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37325 arg "changes-merge"
37331 \begin_layout Standard
37332 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37334 \begin_inset Index idx
37337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37346 \begin_layout Standard
37347 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37353 \begin_layout Standard
37354 \begin_inset Graphics
37355 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37363 \begin_layout Standard
37364 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37370 \begin_layout Standard
37371 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37374 \begin_layout Standard
37375 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37381 \begin_layout Standard
37382 \begin_inset Tabular
37383 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37384 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37385 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37386 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37396 arg "changes-track"
37404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37412 \begin_inset space ~
37415 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37417 \begin_inset space ~
37426 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37435 arg "changes-output"
37443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37449 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37451 \begin_inset space ~
37454 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37456 \begin_inset space ~
37460 \begin_inset space ~
37464 \begin_inset space ~
37473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37494 Jumps to the next change
37500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37509 arg "change-accept"
37517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37525 \begin_inset space ~
37528 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37530 \begin_inset space ~
37539 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37548 arg "change-reject"
37556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37562 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37564 \begin_inset space ~
37567 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37569 \begin_inset space ~
37578 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37587 arg "changes-merge"
37595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37601 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37603 \begin_inset space ~
37606 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37608 \begin_inset space ~
37617 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37626 arg "all-changes-accept"
37634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37640 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37642 \begin_inset space ~
37645 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37647 \begin_inset space ~
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37660 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37669 arg "all-changes-reject"
37677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37683 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37685 \begin_inset space ~
37688 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37690 \begin_inset space ~
37694 \begin_inset space ~
37703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37727 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
37729 \begin_inset space ~
37738 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37761 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37763 \begin_inset space ~
37779 \begin_layout Standard
37780 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37786 \begin_layout Standard
37787 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37807 \begin_layout Standard
37808 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37809 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37810 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37811 the next change after the current cursor position.
37812 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
37813 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
37814 step to the next change.
37815 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
37818 \begin_layout Standard
37819 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
37820 to describe a change.
37823 \begin_layout Standard
37824 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37830 \begin_inset Index idx
37833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37841 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37843 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37850 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37854 \begin_layout Section
37855 Comparison of Documents
37856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37858 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37863 \begin_inset Index idx
37866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37867 Comparison of documents
37875 \begin_layout Standard
37876 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
37879 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37883 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
37884 file with change tracking enabled showing the
37886 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
37888 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
37892 \begin_inset space ~
37896 \begin_inset space ~
37900 \begin_inset space ~
37909 \begin_inset space ~
37913 \begin_inset space ~
37917 \begin_inset space ~
37921 \begin_inset space ~
37925 \begin_inset space ~
37929 \begin_inset space ~
37934 enables the change tracking option
37937 \begin_inset space ~
37941 \begin_inset space ~
37945 \begin_inset space ~
37950 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
37953 \begin_layout Section
37954 International Support
37955 \begin_inset Index idx
37958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37959 International support
37967 \begin_layout Standard
37968 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37969 with any language you want.
37970 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37971 up \SpecialChar LyX
37973 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37975 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
37983 \begin_layout Standard
37984 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
37985 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
37986 \begin_inset space ~
37990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37992 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
37999 \begin_layout Subsection
38001 \begin_inset Index idx
38004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38011 \begin_inset Index idx
38014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38015 Document ! Settings
38021 \begin_inset Index idx
38024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38025 Document ! Language
38033 \begin_layout Standard
38036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38037 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38040 dialog lets you set
38042 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38047 \begin_layout Standard
38052 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38057 \begin_inset space ~
38062 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38063 For details about the different encoding options see section
38064 \begin_inset space ~
38068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38070 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38077 \begin_layout Subsection
38078 Keyboard mapping configuration
38079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38081 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38088 \begin_layout Standard
38089 If you have for example a U.
38090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38093 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38094 can use an alternate keymap.
38095 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38100 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38101 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38102 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38105 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38106 \begin_inset space ~
38110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38112 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38117 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38118 which one you want to use.
38121 \begin_layout Standard
38122 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38123 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38124 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38128 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38129 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38130 one to support the characters you want.
38131 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38138 \begin_layout Chapter
38141 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38143 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38150 \begin_layout Standard
38151 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38152 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38153 topic inside the user's guide.
38156 \begin_layout Section
38158 \begin_inset Index idx
38161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38170 \begin_layout Standard
38175 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38178 \begin_layout Subsection
38182 \begin_layout Standard
38183 Creates a new document.
38186 \begin_layout Subsection
38190 \begin_layout Standard
38191 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38192 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38193 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38196 \begin_layout Subsection
38200 \begin_layout Standard
38204 \begin_layout Subsection
38208 \begin_layout Standard
38209 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38210 Click there on a file to open it.
38213 \begin_layout Subsection
38217 \begin_layout Standard
38218 Closes the current document.
38221 \begin_layout Subsection
38225 \begin_layout Standard
38226 Closes all opened documents.
38229 \begin_layout Subsection
38233 \begin_layout Standard
38234 Saves the actual document.
38237 \begin_layout Subsection
38241 \begin_layout Standard
38242 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38245 \begin_layout Subsection
38249 \begin_layout Standard
38250 Saves all opened documents.
38253 \begin_layout Subsection
38257 \begin_layout Standard
38258 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38261 \begin_layout Subsection
38265 \begin_layout Standard
38266 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38267 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38268 It is described in the section
38270 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38275 Additional Features
38280 \begin_layout Subsection
38284 \begin_layout Standard
38285 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38286 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38288 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38289 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38293 \begin_layout Standard
38294 When using the menu entry
38297 \begin_inset space ~
38302 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38319 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38320 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38323 \begin_layout Subsection
38325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38327 name "subsec:Export"
38334 \begin_layout Standard
38335 You can export your document to various file formats.
38336 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38338 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38339 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38340 during its configuration.
38343 \begin_layout Standard
38344 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38346 \begin_inset space ~
38350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38352 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38359 \begin_layout Description
38365 \begin_inset space ~
38368 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38370 \begin_inset space ~
38373 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38374 \begin_inset Newline newline
38377 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38378 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38382 \begin_layout Description
38383 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38389 \begin_layout Description
38391 \begin_inset space ~
38394 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38400 \begin_layout Description
38401 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38402 's native DVI-format.
38403 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38404 files paths or file names in your document.
38406 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38413 \begin_layout Description
38414 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38415 in files paths or file names
38418 \begin_layout Description
38420 \begin_inset space ~
38427 ) DVI-format using the program
38429 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38432 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38436 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38444 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38452 \begin_layout Description
38454 \begin_inset space ~
38457 (cropped) the same as
38461 but with cropped page margins.
38464 \begin_layout Description
38466 \begin_inset space ~
38469 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38473 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38478 \begin_layout Description
38482 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38490 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38498 \begin_layout Description
38500 \begin_inset space ~
38504 \begin_inset space ~
38507 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38511 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38519 \begin_layout Description
38523 \begin_inset space ~
38532 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38533 source that is compilable with the program
38535 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38539 \begin_layout Description
38543 \begin_inset space ~
38548 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38549 source, additionally all images used in the document
38550 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38554 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38557 \begin_layout Description
38561 \begin_inset space ~
38566 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38567 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38568 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38576 \begin_layout Description
38580 \begin_inset space ~
38589 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38590 source that is compilable with the program
38596 \begin_layout Description
38598 \begin_inset space ~
38602 \begin_inset space ~
38609 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38610 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38616 \begin_layout Description
38618 \begin_inset space ~
38621 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38622 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38628 \begin_inset space \space{}
38633 \begin_inset space ~
38637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38652 represent the version number)
38655 \begin_layout Description
38657 \begin_inset space ~
38661 \begin_inset space ~
38664 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
38665 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
38666 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38670 \begin_layout Description
38671 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
38672 's internal XHTML engine
38675 \begin_layout Description
38677 \begin_inset space ~
38681 \begin_inset space ~
38685 \begin_inset space ~
38689 \begin_inset space ~
38692 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
38697 For the conversion the program
38706 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38709 \begin_layout Description
38710 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
38715 \begin_layout Description
38717 \begin_inset space ~
38720 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
38722 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38725 For the conversion the program
38734 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38737 \begin_layout Description
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38742 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
38743 For the conversion the program
38752 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38755 \begin_layout Description
38757 \begin_inset space ~
38760 (cropped) the same as
38763 \begin_inset space ~
38768 but with cropped page margins
38771 \begin_layout Description
38775 \begin_inset space ~
38780 PDF-format using the program
38784 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38787 \begin_layout Description
38791 \begin_inset space ~
38795 \begin_inset space ~
38803 \begin_inset space ~
38808 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
38809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38813 \begin_inset space \space{}
38816 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
38820 \begin_layout Description
38824 \begin_inset space ~
38829 PDF-format using the program
38831 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38834 , produces PDF-files directly
38837 \begin_layout Description
38841 \begin_inset space ~
38846 PDF-format using the program
38850 , produces PDF-files directly
38853 \begin_layout Description
38857 \begin_inset space ~
38862 PDF-format using the program
38866 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38869 \begin_layout Description
38873 \begin_inset space ~
38878 PDF-format using the program
38883 , produces PDF-files directly
38886 \begin_layout Description
38890 \begin_inset space ~
38898 \begin_layout Description
38902 \begin_inset space ~
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38911 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38912 and then exported as text using the program
38917 \begin_layout Description
38922 PostScript format using the program
38930 options see section
38931 \begin_inset space ~
38935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38937 reference "subsec:General-output"
38944 \begin_layout Description
38945 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38946 source and also code in the statistical programming
38960 it is possible to use
38964 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38968 \begin_layout Standard
38969 If one of the menu entries
38976 \begin_inset space ~
38985 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38987 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38989 \begin_inset space ~
38993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38995 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39000 \begin_inset Index idx
39003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39004 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39013 \begin_layout Subsection
39017 \begin_layout Standard
39018 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39019 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39022 \begin_inset space ~
39026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39028 reference "sec:Paths"
39033 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39042 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39043 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39044 's preferences as described in section
39045 \begin_inset space ~
39049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39051 reference "subsec:Converters"
39058 \begin_layout Subsection
39059 New and Close Window
39062 \begin_layout Standard
39063 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39067 \begin_layout Subsection
39071 \begin_layout Standard
39072 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39075 \begin_layout Section
39077 \begin_inset Index idx
39080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39089 \begin_layout Subsection
39093 \begin_layout Standard
39094 Described in section
39095 \begin_inset space ~
39099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39101 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39108 \begin_layout Subsection
39109 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39112 \begin_layout Standard
39113 Described in section
39114 \begin_inset space ~
39118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39120 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39127 \begin_layout Subsection
39131 \begin_layout Standard
39132 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39133 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39136 \begin_layout Subsection
39140 \begin_layout Standard
39141 Selects the whole document.
39144 \begin_layout Subsection
39145 Find & Replace (Quick)
39148 \begin_layout Standard
39149 Described in section
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39156 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39163 \begin_layout Subsection
39164 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39167 \begin_layout Standard
39168 Described in section
39169 \begin_inset space ~
39173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39175 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39182 \begin_layout Subsection
39183 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39186 \begin_layout Standard
39187 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39191 \begin_layout Subsection
39193 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39197 \begin_layout Standard
39199 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39200 Described in section
39201 \begin_inset space ~
39205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39207 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39216 \begin_layout Subsection
39218 \begin_inset Index idx
39221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39222 Paragraph ! Settings
39230 \begin_layout Standard
39231 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39232 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39236 \begin_layout Standard
39237 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39238 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39245 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39247 \begin_inset space ~
39253 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39257 \begin_layout Subsection
39259 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39263 \begin_layout Standard
39265 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39266 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39271 \begin_layout Enumerate
39273 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39274 Customize text properties by means of the
39280 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39283 ; this is described in section
39284 \begin_inset space ~
39288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39290 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39297 \begin_layout Enumerate
39299 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39300 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39302 Apply last settings
39305 \begin_layout Enumerate
39307 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39308 Change the casing of selected text (
39323 \begin_layout Subsection
39325 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39329 \begin_layout Standard
39331 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39332 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39333 text styles (in the case of this document:
39355 \begin_inset space ~
39359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39361 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39370 \begin_layout Subsection
39371 Table and Rows & Columns
39374 \begin_layout Standard
39375 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39376 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39377 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39380 \begin_layout Subsection
39384 \begin_layout Standard
39385 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39386 It will dissolve this inset.
39387 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39391 \begin_layout Subsection
39395 \begin_layout Standard
39396 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39397 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39400 \begin_layout Subsection
39401 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39404 \begin_layout Standard
39405 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39407 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39408 \begin_inset space ~
39412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39414 reference "sec:Nesting"
39419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39421 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39428 \begin_layout Section
39430 \begin_inset Index idx
39433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39442 \begin_layout Standard
39443 At the bottom of the
39447 menu the opened documents are listed.
39450 \begin_layout Subsection
39451 Open/Close all Insets
39454 \begin_layout Standard
39455 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39458 \begin_layout Subsection
39459 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39462 \begin_layout Standard
39463 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39466 \begin_layout Standard
39467 Math macros are described in the
39474 \begin_layout Subsection
39478 \begin_layout Standard
39479 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39480 \begin_inset space ~
39484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39486 reference "sec:Navigating"
39491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39493 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39500 \begin_layout Subsection
39504 \begin_layout Standard
39505 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39507 \begin_inset space ~
39511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39513 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39520 \begin_layout Subsection
39524 \begin_layout Standard
39525 Opens a window showing console messages.
39526 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39531 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39532 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39533 is processing the document.
39536 \begin_layout Subsection
39538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39540 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39545 \begin_inset Index idx
39548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39557 \begin_layout Standard
39558 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39560 All toolbars and the
39563 \begin_inset space ~
39568 can be turned on and off.
39573 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39585 \begin_inset space ~
39597 \begin_inset space ~
39602 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39606 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39613 \begin_layout Standard
39618 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39622 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39623 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39624 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39625 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39626 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39629 \begin_layout Standard
39631 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39632 \begin_inset space ~
39636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39638 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39645 \begin_layout Subsection
39649 \begin_layout Standard
39653 \begin_inset space ~
39657 \begin_inset space ~
39661 \begin_inset space ~
39665 \begin_inset space ~
39669 \begin_inset space ~
39673 \begin_inset space ~
39678 will split \SpecialChar LyX
39679 's main window vertically while
39682 \begin_inset space ~
39686 \begin_inset space ~
39690 \begin_inset space ~
39694 \begin_inset space ~
39698 \begin_inset space ~
39702 \begin_inset space ~
39707 will split it horizontally.
39708 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
39709 to view the same document, but at different positions.
39710 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
39711 three or more documents at the same time.
39712 To close a split view, use the menu
39715 \begin_inset space ~
39719 \begin_inset space ~
39727 \begin_layout Subsection
39731 \begin_layout Standard
39732 Closes a split view.
39735 \begin_layout Subsection
39739 \begin_layout Standard
39740 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
39741 so that you will see nothing but your text.
39742 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
39743 's main window fullscreen.
39744 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
39745 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
39748 \begin_layout Section
39750 \begin_inset Index idx
39753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39762 \begin_layout Subsection
39766 \begin_layout Standard
39767 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
39768 \begin_inset space ~
39772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39774 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
39785 \begin_layout Subsection
39787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39789 name "subsec:Special-Character"
39796 \begin_layout Standard
39797 Here you can insert the following characters:
39800 \begin_layout Description
39805 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
39808 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
39809 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39810 -packages you have installed.
39811 You can get a complete display by checking
39814 \begin_inset space ~
39820 \begin_inset Newline newline
39824 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39832 Not all characters will be visible in the
39836 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
39837 dialog (see section
39838 \begin_inset space ~
39842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39844 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
39848 ) can display every character.
39856 \begin_layout Description
39857 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
39861 \begin_layout Description
39863 \begin_inset space ~
39867 \begin_inset space ~
39870 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
39871 \begin_inset space ~
39875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39877 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
39884 \begin_layout Description
39886 \begin_inset space ~
39889 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
39892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39893 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39899 \begin_layout Description
39901 \begin_inset space ~
39904 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
39907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39914 \begin_layout Description
39916 \begin_inset space ~
39919 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
39923 \begin_layout Description
39925 \begin_inset space ~
39928 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
39932 \begin_layout Description
39934 \begin_inset space ~
39937 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
39943 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39949 \begin_layout Description
39951 \begin_inset space ~
39954 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
39958 \begin_layout Description
39960 \begin_inset space ~
39964 \begin_inset Index idx
39967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39974 \begin_inset Index idx
39977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39978 Language ! Phonetic symbols
39983 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
39984 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
39986 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39992 \begin_inset Index idx
39995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40003 \begin_inset Newline newline
40006 More information about this feature can be found in the
40012 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40018 \begin_layout Description
40019 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40021 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40022 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40026 \begin_layout Subsection
40030 \begin_layout Standard
40031 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40034 \begin_layout Description
40035 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40036 \begin_inset script superscript
40038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40047 \begin_layout Description
40048 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40049 \begin_inset script subscript
40051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40060 \begin_layout Description
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40065 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40066 \begin_inset space ~
40070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40072 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40079 \begin_layout Description
40081 \begin_inset space ~
40084 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40085 \begin_inset space ~
40089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40091 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40098 \begin_layout Description
40100 \begin_inset space ~
40103 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40104 \begin_inset space ~
40108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40110 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40117 \begin_layout Description
40119 \begin_inset space ~
40122 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40128 \begin_inset space \space{}
40131 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40132 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40141 To insert a fraction use the command
40146 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40150 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40159 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40166 \begin_layout Description
40168 \begin_inset space ~
40171 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40172 \begin_inset space ~
40176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40178 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40185 \begin_layout Description
40187 \begin_inset space ~
40190 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40191 \begin_inset space ~
40195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40197 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40204 \begin_layout Description
40206 \begin_inset space ~
40209 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40210 \begin_inset space ~
40214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40216 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40223 \begin_layout Description
40224 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40225 \begin_inset space ~
40229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40231 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40238 \begin_layout Description
40240 \begin_inset space ~
40243 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40244 \begin_inset space ~
40248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40250 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40257 \begin_layout Description
40259 \begin_inset space ~
40262 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40263 \begin_inset space ~
40267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40269 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40276 \begin_layout Description
40278 \begin_inset space ~
40282 \begin_inset space ~
40285 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40288 \begin_inset space ~
40292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40294 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40301 for a usage example.
40304 \begin_layout Description
40306 \begin_inset space ~
40310 \begin_inset space ~
40313 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40314 \begin_inset space ~
40318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40320 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40327 \begin_layout Description
40329 \begin_inset space ~
40332 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40333 as described in section
40334 \begin_inset space ~
40338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40340 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40347 \begin_layout Description
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40352 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40359 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40366 \begin_layout Description
40368 \begin_inset space ~
40371 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40372 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40374 \begin_inset space ~
40378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40380 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40387 \begin_layout Description
40389 \begin_inset space ~
40392 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40393 \begin_inset space ~
40397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40399 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40406 \begin_layout Description
40408 \begin_inset space ~
40412 \begin_inset space ~
40415 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40416 \begin_inset space ~
40420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40422 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40429 \begin_layout Subsection
40431 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40435 \begin_layout Standard
40437 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40438 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40439 The submenu allows you to insert
40442 \begin_layout Description
40444 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40446 \begin_inset space ~
40449 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40452 \begin_layout Description
40454 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40456 \begin_inset space ~
40460 \begin_inset space ~
40463 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40467 \begin_layout Description
40469 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40471 \begin_inset space ~
40474 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40477 \begin_layout Description
40479 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40481 \begin_inset space ~
40484 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40487 \begin_layout Description
40489 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40491 \begin_inset space ~
40495 \begin_inset space ~
40498 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40502 \begin_layout Description
40504 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40506 \begin_inset space ~
40509 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40512 \begin_layout Description
40514 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40516 \begin_inset space ~
40520 \begin_inset space ~
40524 \begin_inset space ~
40527 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40530 \begin_layout Description
40532 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40534 \begin_inset space ~
40537 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40539 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40540 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40546 \begin_layout Description
40548 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40550 \begin_inset space ~
40553 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40555 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40556 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40562 \begin_layout Description
40564 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40565 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40566 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40567 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40570 \begin_layout Subsection
40574 \begin_layout Standard
40575 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40579 \begin_inset space ~
40600 are described in section
40601 \begin_inset space ~
40605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40607 reference "sec:toc"
40616 is described in section
40617 \begin_inset space ~
40621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40623 reference "sec:Index"
40631 is described in section
40632 \begin_inset space ~
40636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40638 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40644 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40647 is described in section
40648 \begin_inset space ~
40652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40654 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
40661 \begin_layout Subsection
40665 \begin_layout Standard
40666 To insert floats, as described in section
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40673 reference "sec:Floats"
40677 and in detail the chapter
40684 \begin_inset space ~
40692 \begin_layout Subsection
40696 \begin_layout Standard
40697 To insert notes, described in section
40698 \begin_inset space ~
40702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40704 reference "sec:Notes"
40711 \begin_layout Subsection
40715 \begin_layout Standard
40716 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
40718 Branches are described in section
40719 \begin_inset space ~
40723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40725 reference "sec:Branches"
40732 \begin_layout Subsection
40736 \begin_layout Standard
40737 Inserts document class-specific insets.
40738 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
40740 An example is the document class
40741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40748 with three custom insets.
40751 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40755 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
40761 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
40764 \begin_layout Subsection
40766 \begin_inset Index idx
40769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40778 \begin_layout Standard
40779 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
40781 For more information see chapter
40783 External Document Parts
40786 \begin_inset space ~
40792 \begin_layout Subsection
40794 \begin_inset Index idx
40797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40806 \begin_layout Standard
40807 Inserts a box in a certain style.
40808 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
40815 \begin_inset space ~
40823 \begin_layout Subsection
40827 \begin_layout Standard
40832 dialog as described in section
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40839 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40846 \begin_layout Subsection
40850 \begin_layout Standard
40855 as described in section
40856 \begin_inset space ~
40860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40862 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40869 \begin_layout Subsection
40873 \begin_layout Standard
40878 as described in section
40879 \begin_inset space ~
40883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40885 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40892 \begin_layout Subsection
40894 \begin_inset Index idx
40897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40904 \begin_inset Index idx
40907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40908 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
40916 \begin_layout Standard
40917 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
40918 Floats are described in section
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40925 reference "sec:Floats"
40929 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
40931 Multi-page Captions
40936 \begin_inset space ~
40944 \begin_layout Subsection
40948 \begin_layout Standard
40949 Inserts an index entry as described in section
40950 \begin_inset space ~
40954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40956 reference "sec:Index"
40963 \begin_layout Subsection
40967 \begin_layout Standard
40968 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40975 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40982 \begin_layout Subsection
40986 \begin_layout Standard
40987 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
40988 Tables are described in section
40989 \begin_inset space ~
40993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40995 reference "sec:Tables"
40999 and in detail in the chapter
41006 \begin_inset space ~
41014 \begin_layout Subsection
41018 \begin_layout Standard
41024 Graphics are described in section
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41031 reference "sec:Graphics"
41038 \begin_layout Subsection
41042 \begin_layout Standard
41043 Inserts a URL as described in section
41044 \begin_inset space ~
41048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41050 reference "subsec:URLs"
41057 \begin_layout Subsection
41061 \begin_layout Standard
41062 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41069 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41076 \begin_layout Subsection
41080 \begin_layout Standard
41081 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41082 \begin_inset space ~
41086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41088 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41095 \begin_layout Subsection
41099 \begin_layout Standard
41100 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41107 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41114 \begin_layout Subsection
41117 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41120 \begin_layout Standard
41121 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41122 environments of the same type.
41124 \begin_inset space ~
41128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41130 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41134 for an explanation.
41137 \begin_layout Subsection
41141 \begin_layout Standard
41142 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41143 title or caption of a float.
41144 Inserts a short title as described in section
41145 \begin_inset space ~
41149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41151 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41158 \begin_layout Subsection
41163 \begin_layout Standard
41164 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41165 Code box as described in section
41166 \begin_inset space ~
41170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41172 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41179 \begin_layout Subsection
41181 \begin_inset Index idx
41184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41193 \begin_layout Standard
41194 Inserts a program listings box.
41195 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41197 Program Code Listings
41202 \begin_inset space ~
41210 \begin_layout Subsection
41212 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41216 \begin_layout Standard
41218 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41219 Inserts the actual date.
41220 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41227 \begin_layout Subsection
41231 \begin_layout Standard
41232 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41239 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41246 \begin_layout Section
41248 \begin_inset Index idx
41251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41260 \begin_layout Standard
41261 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41265 of the current document.
41266 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41269 \begin_layout Subsection
41273 \begin_layout Standard
41274 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41275 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41276 to jump, for example, between section
41277 \begin_inset space ~
41281 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41285 2.5 and use the submenu
41288 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41315 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41319 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41325 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41328 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41331 \begin_layout Standard
41332 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41336 \begin_inset space ~
41341 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41344 \begin_inset space ~
41349 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41352 \begin_layout Subsection
41353 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41356 \begin_layout Standard
41357 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41361 \begin_layout Subsection
41365 \begin_layout Standard
41366 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41367 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41368 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41372 \begin_inset space ~
41376 \begin_inset space ~
41384 \begin_layout Subsection
41388 \begin_layout Standard
41389 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41392 The \SpecialChar LyX
41393 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41395 \begin_inset space ~
41403 \begin_inset space ~
41408 manual for a detailed description.
41411 \begin_layout Section
41413 \begin_inset Index idx
41416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41425 \begin_layout Subsection
41429 \begin_layout Standard
41430 Change Tracking is described in section
41431 \begin_inset space ~
41435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41437 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41444 \begin_layout Subsection
41452 \begin_layout Standard
41453 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41454 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41455 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41457 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41458 to the clipboard or update the view.
41459 \begin_inset Newline newline
41462 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41466 \begin_layout Standard
41469 Open Containing Directory
41471 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41472 's temporary folder for the document.
41473 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41474 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41475 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41476 For example some journals require to send the
41480 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41484 \begin_layout Subsection
41485 Start Appendix Here
41488 \begin_layout Standard
41489 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41490 as described in section
41491 \begin_inset space ~
41495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41497 reference "sec:Appendices"
41504 \begin_layout Subsection
41506 \begin_inset space ~
41512 \begin_layout Standard
41513 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41514 default output format for the document (menu
41516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41517 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41518 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41520 \begin_inset space ~
41524 \begin_inset space ~
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41536 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41540 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41543 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41544 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41546 \begin_inset space ~
41549 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41551 \begin_inset space ~
41554 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41556 \begin_inset space ~
41560 \begin_inset space ~
41566 \begin_inset space ~
41570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41572 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41576 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41577 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41579 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41580 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41582 \begin_inset space ~
41585 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41590 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41594 \begin_inset space ~
41598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41600 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41605 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41606 when it is first configured.
41607 The default output format is
41610 \begin_inset space ~
41618 \begin_layout Subsection
41619 View (Other Formats)
41622 \begin_layout Standard
41623 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41624 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41625 actual document with an external program.
41626 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41627 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41628 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41630 All possible formats are listed in section
41631 \begin_inset space ~
41635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41637 reference "subsec:Export"
41642 You should at least see the menu entry
41647 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41649 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41651 \begin_inset space ~
41655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41657 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41662 \begin_inset Index idx
41665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41666 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41675 \begin_layout Standard
41676 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
41677 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41679 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41680 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41682 \begin_inset space ~
41685 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41687 \begin_inset space ~
41690 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41694 \begin_inset space ~
41698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41700 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41705 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41706 when it is first configured.
41709 \begin_layout Subsection
41711 \begin_inset space ~
41717 \begin_layout Standard
41718 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
41719 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
41722 \begin_layout Subsection
41723 Update (Other Formats)
41726 \begin_layout Standard
41727 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
41728 your document without opening a new viewer window.
41731 \begin_layout Subsection
41732 View Master Document
41735 \begin_layout Standard
41736 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41752 \begin_inset space ~
41757 manual for more information on this topic).
41758 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
41759 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
41763 \begin_inset space ~
41767 \begin_inset space ~
41772 generates the output of the whole book, while
41776 will just output the chapter alone.
41779 \begin_layout Standard
41780 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41781 in the document settings (menu
41783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41784 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41785 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41787 \begin_inset space ~
41791 \begin_inset space ~
41797 \begin_inset space ~
41801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41803 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41807 ) or in the preferences (menu
41809 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41810 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41812 \begin_inset space ~
41815 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41817 \begin_inset space ~
41820 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41826 \begin_inset space ~
41832 \begin_inset space ~
41836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41838 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41845 \begin_layout Subsection
41846 Update Master Document
41849 \begin_layout Standard
41850 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41871 manual for more information on this topic).
41872 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
41873 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
41876 \begin_layout Standard
41877 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41878 in the document settings (menu
41880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41881 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41882 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41884 \begin_inset space ~
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41894 \begin_inset space ~
41898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41900 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41904 ) or in the preferences (menu
41906 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41907 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41912 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41914 \begin_inset space ~
41917 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41919 \begin_inset space ~
41923 \begin_inset space ~
41929 \begin_inset space ~
41933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41935 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41942 \begin_layout Subsection
41944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41946 name "subsec:Compressed"
41953 \begin_layout Standard
41954 Un/compresses the current document.
41955 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
41956 compression (see the
41958 Additional Features
41960 manual for details).
41963 \begin_layout Subsection
41967 \begin_layout Standard
41968 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
41971 \begin_layout Subsection
41975 \begin_layout Standard
41976 The document settings are described in appendix
41977 \begin_inset space ~
41981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41983 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41990 \begin_layout Section
41992 \begin_inset Index idx
41995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42004 \begin_layout Subsection
42008 \begin_layout Standard
42009 Spell checking is explained in section
42010 \begin_inset space ~
42014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42016 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42023 \begin_layout Subsection
42027 \begin_layout Standard
42028 The thesaurus is described in section
42029 \begin_inset space ~
42033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42035 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42042 \begin_layout Subsection
42044 \begin_inset Index idx
42047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42054 \begin_inset Index idx
42057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42066 \begin_layout Standard
42067 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42068 the highlighted document part.
42071 \begin_layout Subsection
42077 \begin_inset Index idx
42080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42081 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42090 \begin_layout Standard
42091 Generates with the help of the program
42093 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42096 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42097 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42098 This feature is not available on Windows.
42101 \begin_layout Subsection
42107 \begin_inset Index idx
42110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42120 \begin_layout Standard
42121 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42126 \begin_inset space ~
42131 to see the full filename paths.
42134 \begin_layout Subsection
42136 \begin_inset Index idx
42139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42148 \begin_layout Standard
42149 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42150 files as described in section
42151 \begin_inset space ~
42155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42157 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42164 \begin_layout Subsection
42166 \begin_inset Index idx
42169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42182 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42200 \begin_inset Index idx
42203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42204 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42213 \begin_layout Standard
42214 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42215 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42216 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42217 -packages and programs it needs; see
42219 \begin_inset space ~
42223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42225 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42232 \begin_layout Subsection
42236 \begin_layout Standard
42241 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42242 \begin_inset space ~
42246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42248 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42255 \begin_layout Section
42257 \begin_inset Index idx
42260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42269 \begin_layout Standard
42270 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42271 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42273 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42277 \begin_layout Standard
42281 \begin_inset space ~
42286 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42287 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42288 packages and classes found
42289 by \SpecialChar LyX
42291 \begin_inset space ~
42295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42297 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42304 \begin_layout Standard
42308 \begin_inset space ~
42313 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42318 \begin_layout Section
42320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42322 name "sec:Toolbars"
42329 \begin_layout Standard
42330 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42331 \begin_inset space ~
42335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42337 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42344 \begin_layout Standard
42345 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42346 This is described in the
42348 Additional Features
42353 \begin_layout Subsection
42355 \begin_inset Index idx
42358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42367 \begin_layout Standard
42368 \begin_inset Graphics
42369 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42377 \begin_layout Standard
42378 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42384 \begin_layout Standard
42385 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42402 \begin_inset Note Note
42405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42406 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42411 manual for more information.
42419 \begin_layout Standard
42420 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42426 \begin_layout Standard
42427 \begin_inset Tabular
42428 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42429 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42430 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42431 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42437 \begin_inset Graphics
42438 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42452 pull-down box for the environments
42465 \begin_layout Standard
42466 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42472 \begin_layout Standard
42474 \begin_inset Tabular
42475 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42476 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42477 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42478 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42479 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42502 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42532 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42539 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42562 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42578 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42592 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42608 arg "spelling-continuously"
42616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42620 Spellcheck continuously
42626 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42649 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42656 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42679 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42709 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42739 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42746 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42769 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42771 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
42776 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42785 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42794 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
42802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42808 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42834 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
42842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42848 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42867 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42876 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
42884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42890 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42891 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
42898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42919 Emphasize text, function of the
42920 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
42923 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42925 \begin_inset space ~
42928 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42930 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
42936 arg "dialog-show character"
42947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42968 Set text to noun style, function of the
42969 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
42972 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42974 \begin_inset space ~
42977 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42979 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
42985 arg "dialog-show character"
42996 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43002 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43005 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43018 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43021 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43028 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43034 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43039 arg "textstyle-apply"
43049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43054 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43055 Format text using the current settings in the
43057 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43059 \begin_inset space ~
43062 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43073 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43097 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43099 \begin_inset space ~
43108 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43117 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43131 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43138 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43145 arg "tabular-insert"
43153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43172 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43175 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43188 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43198 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43207 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43219 Toggle outline window on/off,
43221 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43228 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43237 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43249 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43255 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43264 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43276 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43289 \begin_layout Subsection
43291 \begin_inset Index idx
43294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43303 \begin_layout Standard
43304 \begin_inset Graphics
43305 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43313 \begin_layout Standard
43314 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43320 \begin_layout Standard
43321 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43325 \begin_layout Standard
43326 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43332 \begin_layout Standard
43333 \begin_inset Tabular
43334 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43335 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43336 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43337 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43338 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43365 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43374 arg "layout Enumerate"
43382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43392 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43401 arg "layout Itemize"
43409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43455 arg "layout Description"
43463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43473 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43482 arg "depth-increment"
43490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43496 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43498 \begin_inset space ~
43502 \begin_inset space ~
43511 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43520 arg "depth-decrement"
43528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43534 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43536 \begin_inset space ~
43540 \begin_inset space ~
43549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43558 arg "float-insert figure"
43566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43572 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43573 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43580 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43589 arg "float-insert table"
43597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43603 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43604 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43641 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43650 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
43658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43671 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43680 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
43688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43701 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43726 \begin_inset space ~
43735 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43744 arg "nomencl-insert"
43752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43778 arg "footnote-insert"
43786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43792 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43808 arg "marginalnote-insert"
43816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43822 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43824 \begin_inset space ~
43833 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43857 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
43859 \begin_inset space ~
43868 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43877 arg "box-insert Frameless"
43885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43891 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43898 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43921 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43928 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43951 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43953 \begin_inset space ~
43962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43971 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
43979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43985 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43986 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43993 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44002 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44016 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44017 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44019 \begin_inset space ~
44028 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44037 arg "dialog-show character"
44045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44051 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44056 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44063 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44069 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44074 arg "textstyle-apply"
44082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44087 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44088 Format text using the recent settings in the
44091 arg "dialog-show character"
44100 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44109 arg "layout-paragraph"
44117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44123 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44143 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44157 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44171 \begin_layout Subsection
44172 View/Update Toolbar
44173 \begin_inset Index idx
44176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44177 Toolbar ! View / Update
44185 \begin_layout Standard
44186 \begin_inset Graphics
44187 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44194 \begin_layout Standard
44195 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44201 \begin_layout Standard
44202 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44206 \begin_layout Standard
44207 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44213 \begin_layout Standard
44214 \begin_inset Tabular
44215 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44216 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44217 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44218 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44242 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44258 arg "buffer-update"
44266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44272 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44288 arg "master-buffer-view"
44296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44302 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44304 \begin_inset space ~
44313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44322 arg "master-buffer-update"
44330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44336 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44338 \begin_inset space ~
44342 \begin_inset space ~
44351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44360 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44375 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44376 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44377 Synchronize with Output
44383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44394 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44411 View (Other Formats)
44417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44424 arg "update-others"
44428 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44442 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44443 Update (Other Formats)
44456 \begin_layout Standard
44458 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44459 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44465 \begin_layout Subsection
44469 \begin_layout Standard
44470 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44471 \begin_inset space ~
44475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44477 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44481 , the table toolbar
44482 \begin_inset Index idx
44485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44494 \begin_inset space ~
44499 manual and the math macro toolbar
44500 \begin_inset Index idx
44503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44516 \begin_layout Chapter
44517 The Document Settings
44518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44520 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44525 \begin_inset Index idx
44528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44529 Document ! Settings
44537 \begin_layout Standard
44541 \begin_inset space ~
44546 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44547 is called with the menu
44549 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44553 You can save your document settings as default with the
44555 Save as Document Defaults
44557 button in any dialog.
44558 This will create a template named
44562 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44563 when you create a new document without
44567 \begin_layout Standard
44572 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44573 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44576 \begin_layout Standard
44577 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44578 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44579 to find the one you are looking for.
44580 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44581 the submenus of the dialog.
44583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44587 \begin_inset space \space{}
44591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44598 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44599 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44600 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44603 \begin_layout Section
44607 \begin_layout Standard
44608 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44610 Document classes are described in section
44611 \begin_inset space ~
44615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44617 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44625 \begin_layout Standard
44629 \begin_inset space ~
44634 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
44639 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
44640 as a layout for a document class.
44641 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
44643 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
44652 \begin_layout Standard
44653 Some classes use special class options by default.
44654 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
44658 and you can decide to use them or not.
44659 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
44660 recommended you leave them untouched.
44665 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44666 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
44671 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44673 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
44678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44679 When you want to use one of the following drivers
44680 \begin_inset Newline newline
44685 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
44688 \begin_inset Newline newline
44691 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44692 distribution, see section
44697 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44699 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
44712 \begin_layout Standard
44717 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
44718 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
44719 in the background if the child document
44720 is opened without its master.
44721 This way child documents are always compilable.
44722 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
44729 \begin_inset space ~
44737 \begin_layout Standard
44738 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44749 \begin_inset Index idx
44752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44754 packages ! prettyref
44760 \begin_inset Index idx
44763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44765 packages ! refstyle
44770 for cross-references, see section
44771 \begin_inset space ~
44775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44784 \begin_layout Section
44788 \begin_layout Standard
44789 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
44790 Please refer to the section
44793 \begin_inset space ~
44801 \begin_inset space ~
44806 manual for details.
44809 \begin_layout Section
44813 \begin_layout Standard
44814 Modules are explained in section
44815 \begin_inset space ~
44819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44821 reference "subsec:Modules"
44828 \begin_layout Section
44832 \begin_layout Standard
44834 \begin_inset space ~
44838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44840 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
44847 \begin_layout Section
44851 \begin_layout Standard
44852 The document font settings are described in section
44853 \begin_inset space ~
44857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44859 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
44866 \begin_layout Section
44870 \begin_layout Standard
44871 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
44883 \begin_inset space ~
44888 and whether it should be a
44891 \begin_inset space ~
44896 can also be specified here.
44899 \begin_layout Standard
44900 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
44901 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
44902 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
44904 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
44907 \begin_layout Standard
44910 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
44913 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
44914 justifies the text on screen.
44915 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
44919 \begin_layout Section
44923 \begin_layout Standard
44924 This dialog is described in sections
44925 \begin_inset space ~
44929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44931 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
44936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44938 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
44945 \begin_layout Section
44949 \begin_layout Standard
44950 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
44951 \begin_inset space ~
44955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44957 reference "subsec:Margins"
44964 \begin_layout Section
44966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44968 name "sec:Language-encodings"
44973 \begin_inset Index idx
44976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44977 Language ! Encoding
44985 \begin_layout Standard
44986 The document language and quote styles are set here.
44987 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44988 (the \SpecialChar LyX
44990 is always encoded in utf8).
44991 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
44992 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
44993 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
44994 -command is not known for
44995 a particular character).
44998 \begin_layout Standard
44999 If you use the option
45004 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45005 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
45006 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45008 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45009 exactly one encoding.
45010 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45013 \begin_layout Standard
45015 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45016 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45017 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45018 installation supports Unicode), choose
45019 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45020 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45021 is quite incomplete, so
45022 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45027 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45028 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45029 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45030 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45031 -commands is not used, because all
45032 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45033 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45034 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45035 , two new alternative engines
45036 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45038 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45040 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45043 \begin_inset space ~
45051 \begin_inset space ~
45059 \begin_inset space ~
45065 \begin_inset space ~
45069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45071 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45076 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45080 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45083 \begin_layout Standard
45087 \begin_inset space ~
45092 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45093 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45103 The possible settings are:
45106 \begin_layout Description
45107 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45109 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45110 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45114 \begin_inset space ~
45118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45120 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45127 \begin_layout Description
45128 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45129 format you will use.
45130 In many cases this will be
45135 \begin_inset Index idx
45138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45146 If the newer package
45151 \begin_inset Index idx
45154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45156 packages ! polyglossia
45161 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45162 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45163 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45165 this package will be used instead of
45172 \begin_layout Description
45174 \begin_inset space ~
45185 would be more appropriate.
45188 \begin_layout Description
45189 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45190 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45194 (for German texts), type in
45197 \begin_inset Newline newline
45202 usepackage{ngerman}
45205 \begin_layout Description
45206 None will not use a language package.
45207 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45210 \begin_layout Standard
45211 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45214 \begin_layout Description
45216 \begin_inset space ~
45220 \begin_inset space ~
45224 \begin_inset space ~
45231 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45237 \begin_inset Index idx
45240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45242 packages ! inputenc
45248 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45249 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45250 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45254 \begin_layout Description
45255 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45257 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45258 commands, which may result in a big
45259 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45260 -commands are needed.
45263 \begin_layout Description
45265 \begin_inset space ~
45269 \begin_inset space ~
45272 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45275 \begin_layout Description
45277 \begin_inset space ~
45281 \begin_inset space ~
45284 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45287 \begin_layout Description
45289 \begin_inset space ~
45292 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45295 \begin_layout Description
45297 \begin_inset space ~
45301 \begin_inset space ~
45304 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45305 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45308 \begin_layout Description
45310 \begin_inset space ~
45314 \begin_inset space ~
45317 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45321 \begin_layout Description
45323 \begin_inset space ~
45327 \begin_inset space ~
45330 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45331 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45334 \begin_layout Description
45336 \begin_inset space ~
45340 \begin_inset space ~
45344 \begin_inset space ~
45347 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45348 \begin_inset space ~
45354 \begin_layout Description
45356 \begin_inset space ~
45360 \begin_inset space ~
45364 \begin_inset space ~
45367 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45368 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45371 \begin_layout Description
45373 \begin_inset space ~
45377 \begin_inset space ~
45380 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45381 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45382 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45383 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45384 \begin_inset space ~
45388 \begin_inset space ~
45394 \begin_layout Description
45396 \begin_inset space ~
45400 \begin_inset space ~
45403 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
45404 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
45405 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45407 should try to use the encoding Unicode
45408 \begin_inset space ~
45412 \begin_inset space ~
45418 \begin_layout Description
45420 \begin_inset space ~
45424 \begin_inset space ~
45427 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
45430 \begin_layout Description
45432 \begin_inset space ~
45436 \begin_inset space ~
45439 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45442 \begin_layout Description
45444 \begin_inset space ~
45448 \begin_inset space ~
45451 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45454 \begin_layout Description
45456 \begin_inset space ~
45459 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45462 \begin_layout Description
45464 \begin_inset space ~
45467 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
45470 \begin_layout Description
45472 \begin_inset space ~
45476 \begin_inset space ~
45479 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
45482 \begin_layout Description
45484 \begin_inset space ~
45488 \begin_inset space ~
45494 \begin_layout Description
45496 \begin_inset space ~
45500 \begin_inset space ~
45503 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
45506 \begin_layout Description
45508 \begin_inset space ~
45512 \begin_inset space ~
45518 \begin_layout Description
45520 \begin_inset space ~
45524 \begin_inset space ~
45527 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45533 \begin_inset Index idx
45536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45543 , when using this, set the document language to
45548 \begin_layout Description
45550 \begin_inset space ~
45554 \begin_inset space ~
45557 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45562 , when using this, set the document language to
45565 \begin_inset space ~
45571 \begin_layout Description
45573 \begin_inset space ~
45577 \begin_inset space ~
45580 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45586 \begin_inset Index idx
45589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45591 packages ! japanese
45596 , when using this, set the document language to
45601 \begin_layout Description
45603 \begin_inset space ~
45607 \begin_inset space ~
45610 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45615 , when using this, set the document language to
45620 \begin_layout Description
45622 \begin_inset space ~
45626 \begin_inset space ~
45629 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45634 , when using this, set the document language to
45639 \begin_layout Description
45641 \begin_inset space ~
45644 (EUC-KR) for Korean
45647 \begin_layout Description
45649 \begin_inset space ~
45653 \begin_inset space ~
45657 \begin_inset space ~
45660 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
45663 \begin_layout Description
45665 \begin_inset space ~
45669 \begin_inset space ~
45673 \begin_inset space ~
45676 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
45677 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
45678 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
45681 \begin_layout Description
45683 \begin_inset space ~
45687 \begin_inset space ~
45693 \begin_layout Description
45695 \begin_inset space ~
45699 \begin_inset space ~
45702 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
45703 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
45706 \begin_layout Description
45708 \begin_inset space ~
45712 \begin_inset space ~
45715 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45721 \begin_inset Index idx
45724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45731 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
45734 \begin_layout Description
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45744 \begin_inset space ~
45747 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
45754 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45757 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45764 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45765 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45767 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
45770 \begin_layout Description
45772 \begin_inset space ~
45776 \begin_inset space ~
45779 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45785 \begin_inset Index idx
45788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45795 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
45798 \begin_layout Description
45800 \begin_inset space ~
45803 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45809 \begin_inset Index idx
45812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45814 packages ! inputenc
45820 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
45824 \begin_layout Description
45826 \begin_inset space ~
45830 \begin_inset space ~
45834 \begin_inset space ~
45837 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
45838 \begin_inset space ~
45844 \begin_layout Description
45846 \begin_inset space ~
45850 \begin_inset space ~
45854 \begin_inset space ~
45857 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
45858 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
45859 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
45863 \begin_layout Description
45865 \begin_inset space ~
45869 \begin_inset space ~
45873 \begin_inset space ~
45876 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
45877 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
45880 \begin_layout Section
45882 \begin_inset Index idx
45885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45892 \begin_inset Index idx
45895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45902 \begin_inset Index idx
45905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45906 Color ! Shaded boxes
45912 \begin_inset Index idx
45915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45916 Color ! Greyed-out notes
45924 \begin_layout Standard
45925 Here you can alter the font color for the
45929 (default: black), for
45932 \begin_inset space ~
45937 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
45941 (default: white) and for
45944 \begin_inset space ~
45954 sets the color back to the default.
45957 \begin_layout Standard
45958 Clicking any button showing
45966 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
45967 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
45968 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
45969 later more quickly.
45972 \begin_layout Standard
45973 Note, if you change the
45976 \begin_inset space ~
45981 font color and use the option
45984 \begin_inset space ~
45989 in the document settings under
45992 \begin_inset space ~
45997 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
45998 \begin_inset space ~
46002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46004 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46011 \begin_layout Standard
46012 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46018 \begin_layout Standard
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46031 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46034 \begin_inset space ~
46037 Code after a forced page break:
46040 \begin_layout Itemize
46041 For the page color:
46042 \begin_inset Newline newline
46049 pagecolor{color name}
46052 \begin_layout Itemize
46053 For the text color:
46054 \begin_inset Newline newline
46064 \begin_layout Standard
46065 You are restricted to one of
46101 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46108 \begin_inset space ~
46114 \begin_inset Newline newline
46117 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46118 names to refer to them:
46121 \begin_layout Itemize
46127 \begin_inset Newline newline
46132 page_backgroundcolor
46135 \begin_layout Itemize
46139 \begin_inset space ~
46145 \begin_inset Newline newline
46153 \begin_layout Itemize
46157 \begin_inset space ~
46163 \begin_inset Newline newline
46171 \begin_layout Itemize
46175 \begin_inset space ~
46181 \begin_inset Newline newline
46189 \begin_layout Standard
46190 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46193 \begin_inset space ~
46201 \begin_inset space ~
46209 \begin_layout Section
46213 \begin_layout Standard
46214 Here you can adjust the
46218 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46222 as described in section
46223 \begin_inset space ~
46227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46229 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46236 \begin_layout Section
46240 \begin_layout Standard
46241 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46247 \begin_inset Index idx
46250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46252 packages ! biblatex
46262 \begin_inset Index idx
46265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46277 \begin_inset Index idx
46280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46288 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46291 Sectioned bibliography
46293 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46299 \begin_inset Index idx
46302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46304 packages ! bibtopic
46314 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
46315 Finally, you can select a document-specific
46319 for the generation of the bibliography.
46320 For a further description of these possibilities see section
46321 \begin_inset space ~
46325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46327 reference "sec:Bibliography"
46334 \begin_layout Section
46338 \begin_layout Standard
46339 Here you can define the
46343 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
46345 \begin_inset space ~
46349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46351 reference "sec:Index"
46358 \begin_layout Section
46362 \begin_layout Standard
46363 The PDF properties are explained in section
46364 \begin_inset space ~
46368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46370 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46377 \begin_layout Section
46381 \begin_layout Standard
46382 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
46383 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46389 \begin_inset Index idx
46392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46404 \begin_inset Index idx
46407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46419 \begin_inset Index idx
46422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46434 \begin_inset Index idx
46437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46449 \begin_inset Index idx
46452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46454 packages ! mathdots
46464 \begin_inset Index idx
46467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46469 packages ! mathtools
46479 \begin_inset Index idx
46482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46494 \begin_inset Index idx
46497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46499 packages ! stackrel
46509 \begin_inset Index idx
46512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46514 packages ! stmaryrd
46524 \begin_inset Index idx
46527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46529 packages ! undertilde
46534 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
46537 \begin_layout Description
46538 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46539 -errors in formulas,
46540 ensure that you have this enabled.
46543 \begin_layout Description
46544 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
46545 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46546 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
46550 \begin_layout Description
46551 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
46554 \begin_inset space ~
46566 \begin_layout Description
46567 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
46570 \begin_inset space ~
46582 \begin_layout Description
46583 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
46594 \begin_layout Description
46595 mathtools is used for the math commands
46631 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
46638 \begin_layout Description
46639 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
46641 Chemical Symbols and Equations
46650 \begin_layout Description
46651 stackrel is used for the math command
46668 \begin_layout Description
46669 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
46672 \begin_layout Description
46673 undertilde is used for the math command
46681 Accents for one Character
46690 \begin_layout Section
46692 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
46694 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
46700 \begin_layout Standard
46702 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
46703 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
46706 \begin_layout Standard
46708 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
46709 The float placement options
46710 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
46713 are described in the section
46716 \begin_inset space ~
46720 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
46722 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
46730 \begin_inset space ~
46738 \begin_layout Section
46742 \begin_layout Standard
46743 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
46745 Program Code Listings
46750 \begin_inset space ~
46758 \begin_layout Section
46762 \begin_layout Standard
46763 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
46771 set to be used and set the
46776 The itemize environment is described in section
46777 \begin_inset space ~
46781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46783 reference "sec:Itemize"
46790 \begin_layout Standard
46791 You can furthermore specify a
46794 \begin_inset space ~
46799 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46800 command of the desired character.
46801 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
46808 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
46810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46814 \begin_inset space \space{}
46818 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
46828 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
46829 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
46832 \begin_layout Standard
46833 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46841 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46842 -packages in the preamble (menu
46845 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46846 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46849 \begin_inset space ~
46855 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
46859 usepackage{textcomp}
46862 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
46866 usepackage{amssymb}
46876 \begin_layout Section
46880 \begin_layout Standard
46881 Branches are described in section
46882 \begin_inset space ~
46886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46888 reference "sec:Branches"
46895 \begin_layout Section
46897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46899 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
46906 \begin_layout Standard
46907 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
46910 \begin_layout Description
46912 \begin_inset space ~
46916 \begin_inset space ~
46919 Format: The format that is used when you enter
46920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46939 View Master Document
46940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46947 Update Master Document
46948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46955 menu or the toolbar.
46956 The default is set in
46958 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46959 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46961 \begin_inset space ~
46964 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46968 \begin_inset space ~
46972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46974 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46981 \begin_layout Description
46983 \begin_inset space ~
46987 \begin_inset space ~
46990 Output settings for the menu
46992 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46994 \begin_inset space ~
47000 For a detailed description see section
47002 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47007 \begin_inset space ~
47015 \begin_layout Description
47017 \begin_inset space ~
47021 \begin_inset space ~
47024 Options offers settings for the export format
47032 \begin_inset space ~
47037 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47038 \begin_inset space ~
47041 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47045 \begin_inset space ~
47050 settings are described in detail in section
47052 Math Output in XHTML
47057 \begin_inset space ~
47066 \begin_inset space ~
47070 \begin_inset space ~
47075 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47078 \begin_layout Description
47080 \begin_inset space ~
47085 Save transient properties
47087 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47088 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47089 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47093 \begin_layout Itemize
47094 the activation of change tracking
47097 \begin_layout Itemize
47098 the output of tracked changes
47101 \begin_layout Itemize
47102 the recording of the document directory path.
47105 \begin_layout Standard
47106 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47107 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47111 \begin_layout Section
47119 \begin_layout Standard
47120 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47122 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47124 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47126 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47130 \begin_layout Standard
47131 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47132 -syntax is given in section
47133 \begin_inset space ~
47137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47139 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47146 \begin_layout Chapter
47152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47154 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47159 \begin_inset Index idx
47162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47171 \begin_layout Standard
47172 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47174 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47178 It has the following submenus.
47181 \begin_layout Section
47185 \begin_layout Subsection
47189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47190 User Interface File
47191 \begin_inset Index idx
47194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47195 Customization ! of toolbars
47201 \begin_inset Index idx
47204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47205 Customization ! of menus
47213 \begin_layout Standard
47214 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47215 interface (ui) file.
47216 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47224 \begin_layout Description
47229 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47232 \begin_layout Description
47239 the menu entries in popup context menus
47242 \begin_layout Description
47247 specifies the toolbar buttons
47250 \begin_layout Standard
47251 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47252 and edit the entries.
47255 \begin_layout Standard
47256 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
47268 entries must be finished with an explicit
47293 and in the case of the
47294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47306 The syntax for the entries is:
47309 \begin_layout Standard
47310 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47339 \begin_layout Standard
47341 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47344 All the \SpecialChar LyX
47345 -functions are listed in the menu
47347 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
47349 \begin_inset space ~
47357 \begin_layout Standard
47358 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47364 \begin_layout Standard
47365 For example, assuming you use the menu
47367 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47370 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
47374 \begin_layout Standard
47375 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47399 \begin_layout Standard
47401 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47416 to have the sixth bookmark.
47419 \begin_layout Standard
47423 \begin_inset space ~
47428 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
47429 's toolbar buttons.
47430 The currently available icon sets are compared in
47431 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47434 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
47442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47446 \begin_layout Standard
47449 Enable tool tips in main work area
47451 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
47455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47459 \begin_layout Standard
47464 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
47465 should display in the menu
47467 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47469 \begin_inset space ~
47477 \begin_layout Subsection
47481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47485 \begin_layout Standard
47488 Restore window layouts and geometries
47491 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
47492 the last \SpecialChar LyX
47496 \begin_layout Standard
47499 Restore cursor positions
47501 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
47505 \begin_layout Standard
47508 Load opened files from last session
47510 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
47514 \begin_layout Standard
47517 Clear all session information
47519 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
47520 sessions (cursor positions, names
47521 of last opened documents, etc.).
47524 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47528 name "subsec:Backup documents"
47533 \begin_inset Index idx
47536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47545 \begin_layout Standard
47548 Backup original documents when saving
47550 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
47551 it was saved the last time.
47552 It is stored in the
47555 \begin_inset space ~
47561 \begin_inset space ~
47565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47567 reference "sec:Paths"
47571 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
47574 \begin_inset space ~
47580 The backup file has the file extension
47581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47595 \begin_layout Standard
47598 Backup documents, every
47600 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
47603 \begin_layout Standard
47606 Save documents compressed by default
47608 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
47609 \begin_inset space ~
47613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47615 reference "subsec:Compressed"
47620 This applies to newly created documents only.
47621 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
47624 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47625 Windows & work area
47628 \begin_layout Standard
47631 Open documents in tabs
47633 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47637 \begin_layout Standard
47642 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
47647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47649 \begin_inset space ~
47653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47655 reference "sec:Paths"
47659 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
47666 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
47667 documents will be opened in the same running instance
47668 of \SpecialChar LyX
47670 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
47671 instance is created for each file.
47674 \begin_layout Standard
47677 Single close-tab button
47679 is checked, there will only be one close button (
47689 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
47690 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
47691 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
47695 \begin_layout Standard
47696 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47704 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
47705 before the change takes effect.
47713 \begin_layout Standard
47718 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
47720 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
47722 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
47726 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
47727 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
47728 and only want to close the view in once instance.
47731 \begin_layout Subsection
47733 \begin_inset Index idx
47736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47745 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
47752 \begin_layout Standard
47753 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
47757 \begin_layout Standard
47758 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47766 This section only deals with the fonts
47770 the \SpecialChar LyX
47772 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
47775 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47776 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47787 \begin_layout Standard
47788 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47805 (depends on the system) as its
47808 \begin_inset space ~
47824 \begin_layout Standard
47825 You can change the font size with the
47832 \begin_layout Standard
47837 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
47839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47842 points have the size of 1
47843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47847 \begin_inset space ~
47851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47853 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
47858 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
47859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47863 The sizes are explained in detail in section
47864 \begin_inset space ~
47868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47870 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
47877 \begin_layout Subsection
47879 \begin_inset Index idx
47882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47883 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
47890 \begin_inset Index idx
47893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47902 \begin_layout Standard
47903 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
47904 by choosing an item in the
47905 list and selecting the
47912 \begin_layout Standard
47913 By checking the option
47917 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
47920 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
47921 \begin_inset space ~
47925 \begin_inset space ~
47930 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
47933 \begin_layout Subsection
47935 \begin_inset Index idx
47938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47947 \begin_layout Standard
47948 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
47952 \begin_layout Standard
47957 enables previewing snippets of your document.
47958 This feature is described in section
47959 \begin_inset space ~
47963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47965 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
47972 \begin_layout Standard
47973 Checking the option
47976 \begin_inset space ~
47980 \begin_inset space ~
47984 \begin_inset space ~
47989 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
47992 \begin_layout Section
47994 \begin_inset Index idx
47997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48006 \begin_layout Subsection
48010 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48014 \begin_layout Standard
48017 Cursor follows scrollbar
48019 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48023 \begin_layout Standard
48024 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48025 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48026 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48029 \begin_layout Standard
48032 Scroll below end of document
48034 is self-explanatory.
48037 \begin_layout Standard
48038 In \SpecialChar LyX
48039 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48046 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48048 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48049 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48052 \begin_layout Standard
48055 Sort environments alphabetically
48057 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48060 \begin_layout Standard
48063 Group environments by their category
48065 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48068 \begin_layout Standard
48073 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48084 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48088 \begin_layout Standard
48089 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48094 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48095 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48099 \begin_layout Subsection
48101 \begin_inset Index idx
48104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48111 \begin_inset Index idx
48114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48115 Settings ! Shortcuts
48123 \begin_layout Standard
48128 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48130 Several binding files are available, among them:
48133 \begin_layout Description
48134 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48137 \begin_layout Description
48138 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48150 \begin_layout Description
48151 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48162 \begin_layout Standard
48163 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48168 , and binding files for special languages.
48169 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48174 \begin_inset space \space{}
48178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48186 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48187 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48188 will try to use the appropriate binding
48192 \begin_layout Standard
48193 Some binding files, like
48197 , only have a limited scope.
48198 When looking at the end of the file
48202 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48205 \begin_layout Standard
48209 \begin_inset space ~
48213 \begin_inset space ~
48218 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48219 in the selected key binding file.
48222 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48226 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48231 \begin_inset Index idx
48234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48235 Key Bindings ! Editing
48243 \begin_layout Standard
48244 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48245 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48246 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48247 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48250 Show key-bindings containing
48253 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
48254 Insert there for example as keyword
48255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48262 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
48263 functions that contain
48264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48272 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
48273 All \SpecialChar LyX
48274 functions are also listed in the file
48279 that you will find in the
48286 \begin_layout Standard
48287 For example, to add the shortcut
48295 , select the function and press the
48300 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
48301 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
48304 \begin_layout Standard
48305 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
48306 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
48308 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
48309 function names as a semicolon separated list.
48311 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
48316 \begin_layout Standard
48317 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
48320 \begin_layout Standard
48321 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
48323 The syntax of the entries is:
48326 \begin_layout Standard
48332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48351 \begin_layout Standard
48352 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
48353 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
48354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48381 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
48382 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
48383 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
48384 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
48386 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
48390 , you needed to specify it as
48395 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
48398 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
48401 \begin_layout Subsection
48403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48405 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
48410 \begin_inset Index idx
48413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48420 \begin_inset Index idx
48423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48424 Settings ! Keyboard Map
48432 \begin_layout Standard
48433 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
48434 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
48435 provides keyboard maps.
48436 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
48437 is a Romanian one, you can enable
48440 \begin_inset space ~
48444 \begin_inset space ~
48449 and select the keyboard map file named
48456 \begin_layout Standard
48465 keyboard map and, if you use the
48469 bindings, you can select the first and second with
48472 arg "keymap-primary"
48478 arg "keymap-secondary"
48481 respectively or toggle between them with
48484 arg "keymap-toggle"
48490 \begin_layout Standard
48491 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48499 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
48508 \begin_layout Standard
48509 You can also specify the mouse
48511 Wheel scrolling speed
48514 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
48518 Middle mouse button pasting
48520 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
48521 inserts the content of the clipboard.
48524 \begin_layout Standard
48532 \begin_inset space ~
48536 \begin_inset space ~
48541 you can select a key for zooming.
48542 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
48545 \begin_layout Subsection
48549 \begin_layout Standard
48550 Input completion is described in section
48551 \begin_inset space ~
48555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48557 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
48564 \begin_layout Section
48566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48573 \begin_inset Index idx
48576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48583 \begin_inset Index idx
48586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48595 \begin_layout Standard
48596 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
48597 are normally determined during
48599 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
48602 \begin_layout Description
48604 \begin_inset space ~
48607 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
48608 's working directory.
48609 It is the default when you
48620 \begin_inset space ~
48628 \begin_layout Description
48630 \begin_inset space ~
48633 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
48635 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48637 \begin_inset space ~
48641 \begin_inset space ~
48649 \begin_layout Description
48651 \begin_inset space ~
48654 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
48660 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48664 \begin_inset Newline newline
48668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48680 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
48681 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
48689 \begin_layout Description
48691 \begin_inset space ~
48695 \begin_inset Index idx
48698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48704 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
48705 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
48706 \begin_inset space ~
48710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48712 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48720 will be used to save the backups.
48721 \begin_inset Newline newline
48724 Backup files have the ending
48725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48735 \begin_layout Description
48737 \begin_inset space ~
48740 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
48741 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
48743 \begin_inset Newline newline
48750 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48756 You can edit this file with the program
48765 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
48766 in its preferences under
48769 \begin_inset space ~
48775 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
48780 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
48782 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
48783 in your \SpecialChar LyX
48789 and \SpecialChar LyX
48790 need to be running the same time.
48791 \begin_inset Newline newline
48794 The pipe is also used for the
48798 feature, see section
48799 \begin_inset space ~
48803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48805 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48810 \begin_inset Newline newline
48813 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
48814 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
48815 \begin_inset Newline newline
48831 \begin_layout Description
48833 \begin_inset space ~
48836 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
48839 \begin_layout Description
48841 \begin_inset space ~
48844 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
48845 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
48846 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
48849 \begin_layout Description
48851 \begin_inset space ~
48854 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
48860 You only need to specify it if you are using
48864 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
48866 For \SpecialChar LyX
48871 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
48875 \begin_layout Description
48877 \begin_inset space ~
48880 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
48881 When \SpecialChar LyX
48882 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
48883 to find it on the system.
48884 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
48886 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
48888 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48892 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48895 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
48896 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
48899 \begin_layout Description
48901 \begin_inset space ~
48904 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
48905 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
48906 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
48907 code or in the document
48909 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
48911 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
48912 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
48913 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
48914 scanned for the input files.
48915 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
48916 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
48918 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
48919 compilation may fail for some documents.
48922 \begin_layout Section
48926 \begin_layout Standard
48927 Here you can insert your
48936 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
48938 \begin_inset space ~
48942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48944 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48948 , to mark changes you make as yours.
48951 \begin_layout Section
48953 \begin_inset Index idx
48956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48957 Language ! Settings
48963 \begin_inset Index idx
48966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48967 Settings ! Language
48975 \begin_layout Subsection
48977 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48979 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
48986 \begin_layout Description
48988 \begin_inset space ~
48992 \begin_inset space ~
48995 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
48997 You can find its actual translation status here:
48998 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49000 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49008 \begin_layout Description
49010 \begin_inset space ~
49013 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49014 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49015 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49016 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49033 The most widespread language package is
49038 \begin_inset Index idx
49041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49048 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49050 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49051 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49052 come with the alternative
49058 \begin_inset Index idx
49061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49063 packages ! polyglossia
49068 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49069 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
49075 The available selections are described in section
49076 \begin_inset space ~
49080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49082 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
49089 \begin_layout Description
49091 \begin_inset space ~
49094 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49095 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
49096 you can here specify the command to start the package.
49097 An example is the start command
49103 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
49105 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49109 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49125 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49130 \begin_layout Description
49132 \begin_inset space ~
49140 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
49141 command toggles the package on and off.
49144 \begin_layout Description
49146 \begin_inset space ~
49150 \begin_inset space ~
49153 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
49157 \begin_layout Description
49159 \begin_inset space ~
49163 \begin_inset space ~
49166 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
49170 \begin_layout Description
49172 \begin_inset space ~
49176 \begin_inset space ~
49179 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
49180 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
49181 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
49183 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
49190 \begin_layout Description
49192 \begin_inset space ~
49195 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
49197 When this option is not set, the
49200 \begin_inset space ~
49205 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49207 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
49210 \begin_inset space ~
49218 \begin_layout Description
49220 \begin_inset space ~
49226 \begin_inset space ~
49232 When it is not set, the
49235 \begin_inset space ~
49240 is set to the end of the document.
49243 \begin_layout Description
49245 \begin_inset space ~
49249 \begin_inset space ~
49252 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
49253 language will be underlined in blue.
49256 \begin_layout Description
49258 \begin_inset space ~
49262 \begin_inset space ~
49265 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
49266 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
49269 \begin_layout Description
49271 \begin_inset space ~
49274 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
49275 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
49276 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
49277 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
49280 \begin_layout Subsection
49284 \begin_layout Standard
49285 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
49286 \begin_inset space ~
49290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49292 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
49299 \begin_layout Section
49303 \begin_layout Subsection
49305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49307 name "subsec:General-output"
49314 \begin_layout Description
49316 \begin_inset space ~
49319 search Commands that will be used for the menu
49321 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49323 \begin_inset space ~
49329 For a detailed description see section
49331 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49336 \begin_inset space ~
49344 \begin_layout Description
49346 \begin_inset space ~
49349 Options Options for the program
49353 that is used for the export format
49358 \begin_inset space ~
49362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49364 reference "subsec:Export"
49369 Possible options are listed in the
49374 \begin_inset Newline newline
49378 \begin_inset Flex URL
49381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49383 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
49393 \begin_layout Description
49395 \begin_inset space ~
49399 \begin_inset space ~
49402 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
49405 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49406 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
49408 \begin_inset space ~
49414 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
49417 \begin_layout Description
49419 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
49421 \begin_inset space ~
49425 \begin_inset Index idx
49428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49435 \begin_inset Index idx
49438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49439 Settings ! Date format
49444 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
49445 \begin_inset Newline newline
49449 \begin_inset Flex URL
49452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49454 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
49460 \begin_inset Newline newline
49463 For example the format
49464 \begin_inset Newline newline
49468 \begin_inset Newline newline
49471 prints the date as day/month/year.
49476 \begin_layout Description
49478 \begin_inset space ~
49482 \begin_inset space ~
49485 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
49486 is allowed to overwrite on export.
49489 \begin_layout Subsection
49495 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49497 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
49502 \begin_inset Index idx
49505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49506 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
49515 \begin_layout Description
49517 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
49519 \begin_inset space ~
49527 \begin_inset space ~
49531 \begin_inset space ~
49534 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
49539 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
49560 are used for Cyrillic.
49561 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
49562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49574 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
49576 sets up in the background.
49577 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
49582 \begin_layout Description
49584 \begin_inset space ~
49588 \begin_inset space ~
49592 \begin_inset space ~
49596 \begin_inset space ~
49599 options They only have an effect when the program
49603 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
49606 \begin_layout Standard
49607 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
49608 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
49609 manuals of the applications.
49612 \begin_layout Description
49614 \begin_inset space ~
49617 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
49618 \begin_inset space ~
49622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49624 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49631 \begin_layout Description
49633 \begin_inset space ~
49636 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
49637 \begin_inset space ~
49641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49643 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
49650 \begin_layout Description
49652 \begin_inset space ~
49655 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
49656 \begin_inset space ~
49660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49662 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
49669 \begin_layout Description
49675 \begin_inset space ~
49678 command Command for the program
49680 Check\SpecialChar TeX
49683 that is described in the section
49685 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
49690 Additional Features
49695 \begin_layout Standard
49696 There are additionally the following options:
49699 \begin_layout Description
49701 \begin_inset space ~
49705 \begin_inset space ~
49709 \begin_inset space ~
49713 \begin_inset space ~
49718 \begin_inset space ~
49721 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
49722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49739 to separate folders.
49740 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
49742 \begin_inset Index idx
49745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49752 \begin_inset Index idx
49755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49764 \begin_layout Description
49766 \begin_inset space ~
49770 \begin_inset space ~
49774 \begin_inset space ~
49778 \begin_inset space ~
49782 \begin_inset space ~
49786 \begin_inset space ~
49789 changes Removes all manually set
49795 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49796 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49798 \begin_inset space ~
49803 dialog when changing the document class.
49806 \begin_layout Section
49808 \begin_inset space ~
49812 \begin_inset Index idx
49815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49824 \begin_layout Subsection
49826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49828 name "subsec:Converters"
49833 \begin_inset Index idx
49836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49845 \begin_layout Standard
49846 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
49847 from one format to another.
49848 You can modify converters or create new ones.
49849 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
49856 \begin_inset space ~
49861 field and press the
49866 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
49870 \begin_inset space ~
49875 drop-down list, modify the
49879 field and press the
49886 \begin_layout Standard
49889 Converter File Cache
49895 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
49897 Maximum Age (in days
49900 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
49901 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
49904 \begin_layout Standard
49905 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
49906 definition, is described in the section
49917 \begin_layout Subsection
49919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49921 name "sec:File-Formats"
49926 \begin_inset Index idx
49929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49936 \begin_inset Index idx
49939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49948 \begin_layout Standard
49949 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
49959 programs that should be used for certain formats.
49962 \begin_layout Standard
49963 You can also define the
49965 Default output format
49967 that is used when you use
49969 View, Update, View Master Document
49973 Update Master Document
49979 menu or the toolbar.
49982 \begin_layout Standard
49983 More about formats and their options is described in the section
49994 \begin_layout Standard
49995 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
49997 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
49998 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
49999 This is done by specifying a
50004 More about this is described in the section
50015 \begin_layout Chapter
50016 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50018 \begin_inset Index idx
50021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50030 name "chap:Units-available-in"
50037 \begin_layout Standard
50039 \begin_inset space ~
50043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50045 reference "tab:Units"
50049 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50050 and used in this documentation.
50053 \begin_layout Standard
50054 \begin_inset Float table
50061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50062 \begin_inset Caption Standard
50064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50080 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50088 \begin_inset Tabular
50089 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
50090 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
50091 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50092 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
50093 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50246 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
50250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50448 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50517 scaled point (65536
50518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50585 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
50590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50709 % of original image width
50714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50798 \begin_layout Standard
50799 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50802 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
50809 \begin_layout Bibliography
50810 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50811 LatexCommand bibitem
50818 The \SpecialChar LyX
50820 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50823 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
50829 \begin_inset Newline newline
50833 \begin_inset Flex URL
50836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50838 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
50846 \begin_layout Bibliography
50847 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50848 LatexCommand bibitem
50849 key "latexcompanion"
50854 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
50856 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50857 Companion Second Edition.
50860 Addison-Wesley, 2004
50863 \begin_layout Bibliography
50864 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50865 LatexCommand bibitem
50871 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
50874 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50878 Addison-Wesley, 2003
50881 \begin_layout Bibliography
50882 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50883 LatexCommand bibitem
50892 : A Document Preparation System.
50895 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
50898 \begin_layout Bibliography
50899 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50900 LatexCommand bibitem
50910 The \SpecialChar TeX
50914 Addison-Wesley, 1984
50917 \begin_layout Bibliography
50918 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50919 LatexCommand bibitem
50925 The \SpecialChar TeX
50927 \begin_inset Newline newline
50931 \begin_inset Flex URL
50934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50936 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
50944 \begin_layout Bibliography
50945 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50946 LatexCommand bibitem
50952 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50954 \begin_inset Newline newline
50958 \begin_inset Flex URL
50961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50963 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
50971 \begin_layout Bibliography
50972 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50973 LatexCommand bibitem
50980 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50982 name "Documentation"
50983 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
50990 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50994 \begin_inset Newline newline
50998 \begin_inset Flex URL
51001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51003 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
51011 \begin_layout Bibliography
51012 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51013 LatexCommand bibitem
51020 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51022 name "Documentation"
51023 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
51028 how to use the program
51030 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51034 \begin_inset Newline newline
51038 \begin_inset Flex URL
51041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51043 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
51051 \begin_layout Bibliography
51052 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51053 LatexCommand bibitem
51060 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51062 name "Documentation"
51063 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
51068 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51074 \begin_inset Index idx
51077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51079 packages ! biblatex
51085 \begin_inset Newline newline
51089 \begin_inset Flex URL
51092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51094 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
51102 \begin_layout Bibliography
51103 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51104 LatexCommand bibitem
51111 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51113 name "Documentation"
51114 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
51119 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51125 \begin_inset Index idx
51128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51136 \begin_inset Newline newline
51140 \begin_inset Flex URL
51143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51145 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
51153 \begin_layout Bibliography
51154 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51155 LatexCommand bibitem
51162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51164 name "Documentation"
51165 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
51175 \begin_inset Newline newline
51179 \begin_inset Flex URL
51182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51184 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
51192 \begin_layout Bibliography
51193 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51194 LatexCommand bibitem
51195 key "makeindex-man"
51201 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51204 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
51214 \begin_inset Newline newline
51218 \begin_inset Flex URL
51221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51223 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
51231 \begin_layout Bibliography
51232 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51233 LatexCommand bibitem
51240 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51242 name "Documentation"
51243 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
51253 \begin_inset Newline newline
51257 \begin_inset Flex URL
51260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51262 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
51270 \begin_layout Bibliography
51271 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51272 LatexCommand bibitem
51279 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51281 name "Documentation"
51282 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
51287 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
51289 \begin_inset Newline newline
51293 \begin_inset Flex URL
51296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51298 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
51306 \begin_layout Bibliography
51307 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51308 LatexCommand bibitem
51315 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51317 name "Documentation"
51318 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
51323 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51329 \begin_inset Index idx
51332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51340 \begin_inset Newline newline
51344 \begin_inset Flex URL
51347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51349 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
51357 \begin_layout Bibliography
51358 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51359 LatexCommand bibitem
51366 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51368 name "Documentation"
51369 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
51374 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51380 \begin_inset Index idx
51383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51385 packages ! enumitem
51391 \begin_inset Newline newline
51395 \begin_inset Flex URL
51398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51400 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
51408 \begin_layout Bibliography
51409 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51410 LatexCommand bibitem
51417 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51419 name "Documentation"
51420 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
51425 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51431 \begin_inset Index idx
51434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51436 packages ! fancyhdr
51442 \begin_inset Newline newline
51446 \begin_inset Flex URL
51449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51451 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
51459 \begin_layout Bibliography
51460 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51461 LatexCommand bibitem
51468 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51470 name "Documentation"
51471 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
51476 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51482 \begin_inset Index idx
51485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51487 packages ! hyperref
51493 \begin_inset Newline newline
51497 \begin_inset Flex URL
51500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51502 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
51510 \begin_layout Bibliography
51511 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51512 LatexCommand bibitem
51519 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51521 name "Documentation"
51522 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
51527 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51533 \begin_inset Index idx
51536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51538 packages ! microtpye
51544 \begin_inset Newline newline
51548 \begin_inset Flex URL
51551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51553 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
51561 \begin_layout Bibliography
51562 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51563 LatexCommand bibitem
51570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51572 name "Documentation"
51573 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
51578 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51584 \begin_inset Index idx
51587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51595 \begin_inset Newline newline
51599 \begin_inset Flex URL
51602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51604 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
51612 \begin_layout Bibliography
51613 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51614 LatexCommand bibitem
51621 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51623 name "Documentation"
51624 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
51629 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51635 \begin_inset Index idx
51638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51640 packages ! prettyref
51646 \begin_inset Newline newline
51650 \begin_inset Flex URL
51653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51655 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
51663 \begin_layout Bibliography
51664 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51665 LatexCommand bibitem
51672 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51674 name "Documentation"
51675 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
51680 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51686 \begin_inset Index idx
51689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51691 packages ! refstyle
51697 \begin_inset Newline newline
51701 \begin_inset Flex URL
51704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51706 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
51714 \begin_layout Bibliography
51715 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51716 LatexCommand bibitem
51723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51726 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
51731 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51733 \begin_inset Newline newline
51737 \begin_inset Flex URL
51740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51742 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
51750 \begin_layout Bibliography
51751 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51752 LatexCommand bibitem
51759 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51762 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
51767 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51769 \begin_inset Newline newline
51773 \begin_inset Flex URL
51776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51778 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
51786 \begin_layout Bibliography
51787 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51788 LatexCommand bibitem
51795 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51798 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
51803 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51804 for Cyrillic languages:
51805 \begin_inset Newline newline
51809 \begin_inset Flex URL
51812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51814 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
51822 \begin_layout Bibliography
51823 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51824 LatexCommand bibitem
51831 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51834 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
51839 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51841 \begin_inset Newline newline
51845 \begin_inset Flex URL
51848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51850 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
51858 \begin_layout Bibliography
51859 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51860 LatexCommand bibitem
51867 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51870 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
51875 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51877 \begin_inset Newline newline
51881 \begin_inset Flex URL
51884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51886 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
51894 \begin_layout Bibliography
51895 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51896 LatexCommand bibitem
51903 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51906 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
51911 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51913 \begin_inset Newline newline
51917 \begin_inset Flex URL
51920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51922 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
51930 \begin_layout Standard
51931 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51965 \begin_inset Note Note
51968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51975 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
51976 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
51977 bibliography is the second one:
51985 \begin_layout Standard
51986 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
51987 LatexCommand bibtex
51988 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
51989 options "biblio/alphadin"
51996 \begin_layout Standard
51997 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52001 \begin_layout Standard
52005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52011 pagedeclaration}[1]{
52014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52020 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
52028 \begin_inset Note Note
52031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52032 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
52033 \begin_inset space ~
52037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52039 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
52051 \begin_layout Standard
52052 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
52053 LatexCommand printnomenclature
52059 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
52060 LatexCommand printindex